Contents

Mitsubishi A800 Inverter Programming Manual PDF

1 of 236
1 of 236

Summary of Content for Mitsubishi A800 Inverter Programming Manual PDF

IN VER

TER FR

-A 800/F800/E800

PLC FU

N C

TIO N

PR O

G R

A M

M IN

G M

A N

U A

L

K

INVERTER

PLC FUNCTION PROGRAMMING MANUAL

IB(NA)-0600492ENG-K(2204)MEE Printed in Japan Specifications subject to change without notice.

HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BUILDING 2-7-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN

A800/F800/E800

CO NT EN TS

Chapter 1 PLC FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

1.1 Applicable inverter model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

1.1.1 SERIAL number check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

1.2 Related manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

1.3 Function block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

1.4 Operation panel indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

1.5 PLC function specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

1.6 System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

1.7 Operations of PLC function (Pr.414, Pr.415, Pr.498, Pr.1150 to Pr.1199) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

1.8 Prior to creating sequence programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

1.8.1 Precautions for creating sequence programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 1.8.2 The main functions of FR Configurator2 (Developer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 1.8.3 Sequence program execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 1.8.4 Setting the communication parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 1.8.5 Writing sequences programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

1.9 Device map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

1.9.1 I/O device map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 1.9.2 Ethernet I/O device map (master) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 1.9.3 Ethernet I/O device map (slave) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 1.9.4 Internal relay (M) device map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 1.9.5 Data register (D) device map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 1.9.6 Special relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 1.9.7 Special register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 1.9.8 Special register (master) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 1.9.9 Special register (slave) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

1.10 Special registers to monitor and control inverter status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

1.10.1 Always readable data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 1.10.2 Data read by controlling read command (from OFF to ON) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 1.10.3 Data writing method by controlling write command (from OFF to ON) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 1.10.4 Inverter operating status control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 1.10.5 Inverter parameter access error (SD1150) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 1.10.6 Inverter status (SD1151) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 1.10.7 User-defined error (SD1214). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 1.10.8 Monitor setting selection (SD1215 to SD1218) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 1.10.9 Inverter-to-inverter link function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

1.11 Read/Write method of inverter parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

1.11.1 Reading inverter parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 1.11.2 Writing inverter parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

1

1.12 User area reading/writing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64

1.13 Analog I/O function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

1.13.1 Analog input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 1.13.2 Analog output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

1.14 Pulse train input function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67

1.15 PID control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68

1.16 Clearing the flash memory of the PLC function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71

1.17 Constant scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72

Chapter 2 CC-LINK COMMUNICATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

2.1 System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74

2.1.1 System configuration example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

2.2 CC-Link parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76

2.2.1 CC-Link extended setting (Pr.544) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

2.3 CC-Link I/O specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77

2.3.1 I/O signals when one station in the CC-Link Ver.1 is occupied (Pr.544 = "100") . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 2.3.2 I/O signals when the double setting is set in CC-Link Ver.2 (Pr.544 = "112"). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 2.3.3 I/O signals when the quadruple setting is set in CC-Link Ver.2 (Pr. 544 = "114") . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 2.3.4 I/O signals when the octuple setting is set in CC-Link Ver.2 (Pr. 544 = "118 or 128") . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 2.3.5 I/O signals for the CC-Link IE TSN communication (Pr.544 = "138") . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

2.4 Buffer memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

2.4.1 Remote output signals (master station to inverter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 2.4.2 Remote input signals Pr.544 = "100" (inverter to master station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 2.4.3 Remote registers Pr.544 = "100" (master station to inverter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 2.4.4 Remote registers Pr.544 = "100" (inverter to master station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Chapter 3 SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

3.1.1 Overview of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

3.2 RUN/STOP operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96

3.3 Program configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96

3.4 Programming language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97

3.4.1 Relay symbolic language (ladder mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 3.4.2 Function block (FB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

2

CO NT EN TS

3.5 Operation processing method of the PLC function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

3.6 I/O processing method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

3.6.1 Refresh method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 3.6.2 Response delay in refresh mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

3.7 Scan time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

3.8 Values that can be used in sequence programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

3.8.1 BIN (binary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 3.8.2 HEX (hexadecimal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

3.9 Explanation of devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

3.9.1 Device list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 3.9.2 I/O X and Y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 3.9.3 Internal relay M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 3.9.4 Timer T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 3.9.5 Retentive timer ST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 3.9.6 Processing and accuracy of timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

3.10 Counter C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

3.10.1 Count process in refresh mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 3.10.2 Maximum counting speed of counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

3.11 Data register D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

3.12 Special relays and special registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

3.13 Function list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

3.14 RUN/STOP method of PLC function from an external source (remote RUN/STOP). . . . . . . 117

3.15 Watchdog timer (watchdog error supervision timer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

3.16 Self-diagnostic function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

3.16.1 Operation mode when there is an operation error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

3.17 Registering file password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

3.18 Output (Y) status settings when STOP status RUN status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

3.19 Structure of instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

3.20 Bit device processing method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

3.20.1 1-bit processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 3.20.2 Digit specification processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

3

3.21 Handling of numerical values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129

3.22 Operation error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130

3.23 Sequence instructions list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131

3.23.1 How to view the instruction list table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 3.23.2 Sequence instructions list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 3.23.3 Basic instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 3.23.4 Application instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 3.23.5 Display instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 3.23.6 Control syntaxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

3.24 How to view instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140

3.25 Sequence instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141

3.25.1 Contact instruction: operation start, series connection, parallel connection ... LD, LDI, AND, ANI, OR, ORI. . . . . . . . . . 141 3.25.2 Association instruction: ladder block series connection, parallel connection ... ANB, ORB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 3.25.3 Association instruction: operation results, push, read, pop ... MPS, MRD, MPP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 3.25.4 Output instruction: bit device, timer, counter ... OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 3.25.5 Output instruction: device set, reset ... SET, RST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 3.25.6 Output instruction: rising, falling differential output ... PLS, PLF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 3.25.7 Shift instruction: bit device shift ... SFT, SFTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 3.25.8 Master control instruction: master control set, reset ... MC, MCR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 3.25.9 Termination instruction: termination of main program ... FEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 3.25.10 Termination instruction: sequence program termination ... END . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 3.25.11 Other instructions: non-processing ... NOP, NOPLF, PAGE n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

3.26 Basic instruction (16-bit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163

3.26.1 Comparison operation instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 3.26.2 Comparison operation instruction: 16-bit data comparison ... =, <>, >, <=, <, >=. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 3.26.3 Arithmetic operation instruction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 3.26.4 Arithmetic operation instruction: BIN 16-bit addition/subtraction ... +, +P, -, -P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 3.26.5 Arithmetic operation instruction: BIN 16-bit multiplication/division ... *, *P, /, /P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 3.26.6 Arithmetic operation instruction: BIN 16-bit data increment/decrement ... INC, INCP, DEC, DECP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 3.26.7 Data transfer instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 3.26.8 Data transfer instruction: 16-bit data transfer ... MOV, MOVP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 3.26.9 Data conversion instruction: 2s complements of BIN 16-bit data ... NEG, NEGP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 3.26.10 Data conversion instructions: BIN 16-bit data BCD conversions ... BCD, BCDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 3.26.11 Data conversion instructions: BIN 16-bit data BIN conversions ... BIN, BINP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

3.27 Basic instruction (32-bit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179

3.27.1 Comparison operation instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 3.27.2 Comparison operation instruction: 32-bit data comparison ... D=, D<>, D>, D<=, D<, D>= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 3.27.3 Arithmetic operation instruction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 3.27.4 Arithmetic operation instruction: BIN 32-bit addition/subtraction ... D+, D+P, D-, D-P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 3.27.5 Arithmetic operation instruction: BIN 32-bit multiplication/division ... D*, D*P, D/, D/P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 3.27.6 Arithmetic operation instruction: BIN 32-bit data increment/decrement ... DINC, DINCP, DDEC, DDECP . . . . . . . . . . . 188 3.27.7 Data transfer instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 3.27.8 Data transfer instruction: 32-bit data transfer ... DMOV, DMOVP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 3.27.9 Data conversion instruction: 2's complements of BIN 32-bit data ... DNEG, DNEGP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 3.27.10 Data conversion instructions: BIN 32-bit data BCD conversions ... DBCD, DBCDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 3.27.11 Data conversion instructions: BIN 32-bit data BIN conversions ... DBIN, DBINP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 3.27.12 Program branch instruction:CJ, SCJ, JMP, GOEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

3.28 Application instructions (16-bit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196

3.28.1 Logical operation instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 3.28.2 Logical operation instruction: BIN 16-bit logical AND ... WAND, WANDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 3.28.3 Logical operation instruction: BIN 16-bit logical OR ... WOR, WORP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 3.28.4 Logical operation instruction: BIN 16-bit data exclusive OR ... WXOR, WXORP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 3.28.5 Logical operation instruction: BIN 16-bit data exclusive NOR ... WXNR, WXNRP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

4

CO NT EN TS

3.29 Application instructions (32-bit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

3.29.1 Logical operation instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 3.29.2 Logical operation instruction: BIN 32-bit logical AND ... DAND, DANDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 3.29.3 Logical operation instruction: BIN 32-bit logical OR ... DOR, DORP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 3.29.4 Logical operation instruction: BIN 32-bit data exclusive OR ... DXOR, DXORP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 3.29.5 Logical operation instruction: BIN 32-bit data exclusive NOR ... DXNR, DXNRP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

3.30 Display instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

3.30.1 Character string data transfer ... $MOV, $MOVP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 3.30.2 Character string output ... G. PRR, GP.PRR, UMSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Chapter 4 ERROR CODE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

4.1 How to read error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Chapter 5 APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

5.1 Instruction processing time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

5.2 How to check specification changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

5.2.1 Details of specification changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 REVISIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

5

6

MEMO

CHAPTER 1

C H

A PT

ER 1

4

5

PLC FUNCTION

6

7

8

9

10

1.1 Applicable inverter model .........................................................................................................................................8 1.2 Related manuals.......................................................................................................................................................9 1.3 Function block diagram.............................................................................................................................................9 1.4 Operation panel indication ......................................................................................................................................10 1.5 PLC function specifications.....................................................................................................................................11 1.6 System configuration ..............................................................................................................................................13 1.7 Operations of PLC function (Pr.414, Pr.415, Pr.498, Pr.1150 to Pr.1199) .............................................................15 1.8 Prior to creating sequence programs......................................................................................................................16 1.9 Device map.............................................................................................................................................................22 1.10 Special registers to monitor and control inverter status..........................................................................................44 1.11 Read/Write method of inverter parameters.............................................................................................................61 1.12 User area reading/writing........................................................................................................................................64 1.13 Analog I/O function .................................................................................................................................................66 1.14 Pulse train input function ........................................................................................................................................67 1.15 PID control ..............................................................................................................................................................68 1.16 Clearing the flash memory of the PLC function ......................................................................................................71 1.17 Constant scan.........................................................................................................................................................72

7

1 PLC FUNCTION This instruction manual explains the functions and devices required for programming. Trademarks

Ethernet is a registered trademark of Fuji Xerox Corporation in Japan. Other company and product names herein are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.

1.1 Applicable inverter model This manual explains the PLC function of the FR-A800 series, FR-A800 Plus series, FR-F800 series, and FR-E800 series. FR- A800-P and FR-A800 Plus series inverters are described as FR-A800 series inverters unless otherwise specified.

1.1.1 SERIAL number check Availability of the following functions depends on the manufacture year and month of the inverter. Check the manufacture year and month by the SERIAL number indicated on the rating plate of the inverter.

: Supported, -: Not supported

The SERIAL consists of one symbol (two symbols for the FR-E800 series), three characters indicating the production year and month, and six characters indicating the control number. The last two digits of the production year are indicated as the Year, and the Month is indicated by 1 to 9, X (October), Y (November), or Z (December).

Function Series Manufacture year and monthFR-A800 (except

for the FR-A800-P) FR-A800 Plus

(FRA800-CRN/LC)

FR-A800 Plus (other than FR- A800-CRN/LC)

FR-F800 FR-E800

Programming language (structured text (ST))

- - - January 2021 or later

32-point devices: Timer (T), retentive timer (ST), and counter (C)

-

256-point device: Pointer (P) - -

Rating plate

SERIAL

Country of origin

Rating plate example

Symbol Control number

SERIAL Year Month

FR-A800/FR-A800 Plus/FR-F800 series

FR-E800 series

Symbol Control number SERIAL

Year Month

8 1. PLC FUNCTION 1.1 Applicable inverter model

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1.2 Related manuals The manuals related to the PLC function are shown below. The download of the latest manuals is free at the Mitsubishi Electric FA Global Website.

1.3 Function block diagram The following function blocks explain I/O information flow to and from the inverter in the PLC function.

I/O information can be read or written by accessing the inverter with special relays, special registers, etc. using predetermined methods.

It is possible to operate the inverter and read and write parameters using input information from control input terminals according to created sequence programs (saved in the inverter). Output signals are also be output from control output terminals, not only as status signals of the inverter but as signals to turn the pilot lamp ON and OFF, interlock signals, and other control signals set by users as desired.

*1 Set "9999" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function assignment) and Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) to use terminals as general-purpose I/O terminals. For details on Pr.178 to Pr.189 and Pr.190 to Pr.196, refer to the Instruction Manual of the inverter.

Manual name Manual number FR-A800 Instruction Manual (Detailed) IB-0600503ENG FR-A860 Instruction Manual (Detailed) IB-0600563ENG FR-F800 Instruction Manual (Detailed) IB-0600547ENG FR-F860 Instruction Manual (Detailed) IB-0600688ENG FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function) IB-0600868ENG FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Communication) IB-0600871ENG Ethernet Function Manual IB-0600628ENG Roll to Roll Function Manual IB-0600622ENG FR Configurator2 Instruction Manual IB-0600516ENG GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) SH-080779ENG

Input signal 1

Inverter

Output signal 1

I/O data

Special relays, special registers, etc.S

eq ue

nc e

pr og

ra m

C P

U

91. PLC FUNCTION 1.2 Related manuals

1

1.4 Operation panel indication When a sequence program is running, the following indicators are displayed on the operation panel and parameter unit.

P.RUN state

NOTE While the offline auto tuning is being activated by FR-PU07, P.RUN is not displayed even during PLC function operation.

Indication Status FR-DU08 (LED)

Operation panel of FR-E800 (LED) FR-DU08 (LCD) FR-PU07 (LCD)

OFF OFF PLC function disabled ON Normal indication PLC function enabled

Inverted indication Sequence program running Blinking Inverted and blinking Sequence error occurring

60.00 Hz STF FWD PU

P.RUN

PREV NEXTSET STOP PU

P.RUN

Hz0. 00 Output frequency 12:34

PLC function indicator P.RUN appears on the display when the PLC function is enabled.

FR-DU08 FR-LU08 FR-PU07

Operation panel of FR-E800 Operation panel of FR-E800-E, and FR-E800-SCE

PLC function indicator PLC function indicator

0 1. PLC FUNCTION 1.4 Operation panel indication

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1.5 PLC function specifications The following table shows the program capacity and devices of the PLC function. Specifications in the following table may not be supported depending on the date of manufacture of the inverter. For details on applicable specifications, refer to page 8.

*1 The scan time is approximately 40 ms for 1K steps as inverter control is also performed in actual operations. *2 The signals same as the ones assigned to the inverter I/O terminals are used.

One point is always required for a sequence start (RUN/STOP). *3 The number of points is changed when the FR-A8TP is installed. *4 The Pr.291 Pulse train I/O selection setting is required. The pulse train output is only available for the FM type inverter.

Item A800/F800 PLC function specifications E800 PLC function specifications Control method Repeated operation (by stored program) I/O control mode Refresh Programming language Relay symbolic language (ladder)

Logic symbolic language Function block

Relay symbolic language (ladder) Logic symbolic language Function block Structured text (ST)

No. of instructions

Sequence instructions 25 Basic instructions 84 88 Application instructions 37

Processing speed Sequence instructions 1.9 s to 12 s/step*1

Number of I/O device points 288 (input: 144 points, output: 144 points) 19 points built-in (input: 12 points, output: 7 points)*2,12 points built-in (input: 8 points, output: 4 points)*2*3

FR-A8AX (input: 16 points) FR-A8AY (output: 7 points) FR-A8AR (output: 3 points)

288 (input: 144 points, output: 144 points) For FR-E800 series :10 points built-in (input: 7 points, output: 3 points)*2 For FR-E800-E series : 3 points built-in (input: 2 points, output: 1 points)*2 For FR-E800-SCE series : 1 points built-in (output: 1 points)*2 FR-A8AX (input: 16 points) FR-A8AY (output: 7 points) FR-A8AR (output: 3 points)

Number of analog I/O points 3 input points built-in (Terminals 1, 2, and 4), FR-A8AZ: 1 input point (Terminal 6) 2 output points built-in (Terminals F/C(FM/ CA) and AM), FR-A8AY: 2 output points (Terminals AM0 and AM1), FR-A8AZ: 1 output point (Terminal DA1)

2 input points built-in (Terminals 2 and 4) 2 output points built-in (Terminals FM and AM), FR-A8AY: 2 output points (Terminals AM0 and AM1)

Pulse train I/O Input Terminal JOG (maximum input pulse: 100k pulses/s)*4

Output Terminal FM (maximum output pulse: 50k pulses/s)*4

Watchdog timer 10 to 2000 ms Program capacity 6K steps (24k bytes) (0 to 6144 steps can be

set), contained in one program 2K steps (8k bytes) (0 to 2048 steps can be set), contained in one program

Device Internal relay (M) 128 (M0 to M127) Latch relay (L) Not used (Can be set with parameters but will not latch)*5

Timer (T) Number of points

32 (T0 to T31) 16 (T0 to T15)

Specifications 100 ms timer: 0.1 to 3276.7 s can be set 10 ms timer: 0.01 to 327.67 s can be set

Retentive timer (ST)

Number of points

16 (ST0 to ST15)*7, 32 (ST0 to ST31)*7 16 (ST0 to ST15)*7

Specifications 100 ms retentive timer: 0.1 to 3276.7 s can be set 10 ms retentive timer: 0.01 to 327.67 s can be set

Counter (C) Number of points

32 (C0 to C31) 16 (C0 to C15)

Specifications Normal counter: Setting range 1 to 32767 Interrupt program counter: Not used

Data register (D) 256 (D0 to D255) Pointer (P) Not used 256 points (P0 to P127, P2048 to P2175*6)

(All are common pointers.) Special relay (SM) 2048 (SM0 to SM2047) with limited functions Special register (SD) 2048 (SD0 to SD2047) with limited functions

111. PLC FUNCTION 1.5 PLC function specifications

1

*5 There is no device latch function for power failures. Use the Pr.1150 to Pr.1199 PLC function user parameters 1 to 50 (D206 to D255) to store device values in the EEPROM. (Refer to page 64.)

*6 P2048 to P2175 are used for automatic assignment. For details of automatic assignment, refer to GX Works2 Operating Manual (Simple Project). *7 The initial value is "0".

NOTE There is no buffer memory.

2 1. PLC FUNCTION 1.5 PLC function specifications

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1.6 System configuration For writing sequence programs to the inverter, use FR Configurator2 (Developer) on the personal computer connected to the inverter. The inverter and the personal computer are connected via USB communication, RS-485 communication, or Ethernet communication. The following figure shows the system configuration for use of the PLC function. For details of the supported communication methods, refer to the Instruction Manual of the inverter.

USB cable Personal computer (FR Configurator2)

Inverter

USB mini B connector

USB connector

Serial cable Personal computer (FR Configurator2)

Inverter

PU connector

RS-232C RS-485 converter

Serial port

Serial cable

RS-422/485 Personal computer (FR Configurator2)

Inverter

Serial port RS-232C RS-485 converter

RS-485 terminal block

Up to 32 inverters can be connected.

Ethernet cable Up to 32 inverters Personal computer

(FR Configurator2)

Inverter

Ethernet connector

Ethernet connector

Hub*1

131. PLC FUNCTION 1.6 System configuration

1

*1 When the inverters to which a sequence program is written are the FR-E800 series only and they are connected in a line, a hub is not required.

Commercially available products (as of February 2015) RS-232C RS-485 conversion cable

*1 The conversion cable cannot connect multiple inverters. (The computer and inverted are connected in a 1:1 pair.) This product is a RS-232C RS-485 conversion cable that has a built-in converter. No additional cable or connector is required. For the product details, contact the manufacturer.

Recommended USB cable for connection between the personal computer and the inverter

FR Configurator2 (Developer) is a programming tool for designing and debugging of the sequence programs on the Windows personal computer. To use the PLC function of the inverter, write sequence programs to the inverter using FR Configurator2 (Developer). (For the details, refer to the Instruction Manual of FR Configurator2.)

Only the FR-A800 series, FR-A800 Plus series, and FR-F800 series are supported.

Model Manufacturer Interface embedded cable dedicated for inverter DINV-CABV*1

Diatrend Corp.

Model Manufacturer MR-J3USBCBL3M (cable length: 3 m) Mitsubishi Electric Corporation

Personal computer (FR Configurator2)

Ethernet connector Router

Ethernet cable

Ethernet connector

Hub*1 Hub*1

Inverter (master)

Inverter (slave 1)

Inverter (slave 2)

Inverter (slave 3)

Inverter (slave 4)

Inverter (slave 5)

RS-422/485 Up to 32 inverters can be connected.Personal computer

(FR Configurator2)

Inverter

PU connector

Serial cable

or

GOT2000

Serial port

Serial port

RS-232C RS-485 converter

4 1. PLC FUNCTION 1.6 System configuration

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

NOTE For details on wiring, refer to the Instruction Manual of the inverter. For the specifications of the FR Configurator2 (Developer) and personal computers on which FR Configurator2

(Developer) runs, refer to the Instruction Manual of FR Configurator2. Programming tools other than FR Configurator2 (Developer) cannot be used. (Tools such as GX Developer and GX Works

cannot be used.) Use Ethernet cables compliant with the following standards.

Use a hub that supports transmission speed of the Ethernet.

1.7 Operations of PLC function (Pr.414, Pr.415, Pr.498, Pr.1150 to Pr.1199)

I/O information can be read or written by accessing the inverter with special relays, special registers, etc. using predetermined methods. It is possible to operate the inverter and read and write parameters using input information from control input terminals according to created sequence programs (saved in the inverter). Output signals are also be output from control output terminals, not only as status signals of the inverter but as signals to turn the pilot lamp ON and OFF, interlock signals, and other control signals set by users as desired.

Communication speed Cable Connector Standard 100 Mbps Category 5 or higher, (shielded / STP) straight cable RJ-45 connector 100BASE-TX 10 Mbps Category 3 or higher, (shielded / STP) straight cable 10BASE-T

Category 3 or higher, (UTP) straight cable

Parameter number Name Initial value

Setting range Refer to page

414 PLC function operation selection 0 0 to 2, 11, 12 17 415 Inverter operation lock mode setting 0 0, 1 17 498 PLC function flash memory clear 0 0, 9696 (0 to 9999) 71 1150 to 1199 PLC function user parameters 1 to 50 0 0 to 65535 64

151. PLC FUNCTION 1.7 Operations of PLC function (Pr.414, Pr.415, Pr.498, Pr.1150 to Pr.1199)

1

1.8 Prior to creating sequence programs

1.8.1 Precautions for creating sequence programs

Writing and access to other stations are not possible while a sequence program is running. Also, reading and writing the program from and to other stations cannot be performed.

To avoid accidentally erasing the created sequence programs, use FR Configurator2 (Developer) to regularly save the data in a personal computer, etc.

If a sequence program contains instructions (refer to page 131) or devices (refer to page 11) that cannot be used with the PLC function, an instruction code error occurs at the execution of that instruction. Error code SD0 = 4000 Error information SD5 to SD26 Error flag SM0: ON

NOTE For the error codes, refer to page 46.

1.8.2 The main functions of FR Configurator2 (Developer) Reading and writing parameter and sequence programs Ladder monitor Device batch monitor Present value change Remote RUN/STOP

NOTE Present values can be changed using FR Configurator2 (Developer) ([Debug] -> [Present value change]). Even if changes

are made to the devices corresponding to the control terminal signals (STF, STR, etc.), such changes are not applied to the inverter operation. (Device present values of the sequence programs are changed.)

6 1. PLC FUNCTION 1.8 Prior to creating sequence programs

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1.8.3 Sequence program execution

Sequence start (SQ) signal Switch the execution key (RUN/STOP) of the sequence program by turning the SQ signal ON/OFF. The sequence program can be executed by turning the SQ signal ON. To input the SQ signal, assign the signal to an input terminal.

For FR-A800/FR-A800 Plus/F800 series When Pr.414 = "1 or 11", the SQ signal must be input according to the command source.

When Pr.414 = "2 or 12", the SQ signal can be input only via an external input terminal regardless of the Pr.338 setting.

For FR-E800 series When Pr.414 = "1 or 11", the SQ signal must be input according to the command source. When the SQ signal is assigned to terminal NET X (communication virtual terminal), the sequence program can be executed just by inputting the signal via terminal NET X. (The SQ signal needs not be input via an external terminal.)

When Pr.414 = "2 or 12", the SQ signal can be input only via an external input terminal regardless of the Pr.338 setting.

For the details, refer to the Instruction Manual of the inverter.

PLC function operation selection (Pr.414) To enable the PLC function, set a value other than "0" in Pr.414 PLC function operation selection Pr.414 PLC function

operation selection. For details, refer to the Instruction Manual of the inverter used. Switch the execution key (RUN/STOP) of the sequence program by turning the SQ signal ON/OFF. The sequence program

can be executed by turning the SQ signal ON. To input the SQ signal, set "50" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) to assign the function to a terminal.

Remote RUN/STOP of the PLC function can be executed in any of the following methods: Using the PLC function parameters (contact) Using FR Configurator2 (Developer) Via CC-Link communication (refer to page 76.)

NOTE Turn OFF (STOP) the SQ signal when creating a sequence program.

Parameter number

Name Initial value Setting range

Description

414 PLC function operation selection

0 0 PLC function disabled 1, 11 PLC function

enabled For details, refer to the Instruction Manual of the inverter used.2, 12

415 Inverter operation lock mode setting

0 0 The start signal of the inverter is enabled regardless of execution instruction of the sequence program.

1 The start signal of the inverter is enabled only when the sequence program is in RUN state. (The SQ signal is ON.) When the sequence program is in STOP state (the SQ signal is OFF), the inverter will not start even if the start signal STF or STR is turned ON. (If the state is changed from RUN to STOP during operation, the inverter decelerates and stops.)

Pr.414 setting Pr.338 setting SQ signal Input via an external (physical) terminal Input via a communication virtual terminal

1, 11 0 ON ON 1 ON

2, 12 ON

Pr.414 setting Pr.338 setting SQ signal Input via an external (physical) terminal Input via a communication virtual terminal

1, 11 0 ON ON ON (NET X)

1 ON 2, 12 ON

171. PLC FUNCTION 1.8 Prior to creating sequence programs

1

The RUN state output (Y) is internally stored and all outputs (Y) are turned OFF by turning the SQ signal OFF (STOP) after sequence program execution (SQ signal ON). The other devices retain the data prior to STOP. To clear the remaining device data, power OFF or reset (RES signal ON (0.1 s)OFF) the inverter.

8 1. PLC FUNCTION 1.8 Prior to creating sequence programs

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Inverter operation lock mode setting (Pr.415) When "1" is set in Pr.415 Inverter operation lock mode setting, the inverter can be operated only when the sequence

program is set to the "RUN" status. By changing the PLC program status from RUN to STOP during inverter operation, the motor decelerates to stop.

To run the inverter without using the PLC function, set Pr.415 = "0" (initial value) (the start signal of the inverter is enabled).

NOTE This parameter cannot be written during inverter operation, regardless of the Pr.77 setting. During automatic operation using SD1148 (or SM1200 to SM1211) in the sequence program, the inverter stops operation

if the sequence program is in the STOP state while Pr.415 = "1". However, when Pr.415 = "0", the device data is retained and the operating status does not change (the inverter continues operation) even if the sequence program is in the STOP state.

Pr.415 setting is also enabled for the start signals of the operation panel.

191. PLC FUNCTION 1.8 Prior to creating sequence programs

2

1.8.4 Setting the communication parameter

For RS-485 communication between the inverter and FR Configurator2, communication cannot be established when the inverter communication parameter settings and the FR Configurator2 communication settings differ. For Ethernet connection, communication cannot be established when the application or protocol settings differ.

Set "9999" in one of the following parameters according to the communication type: Pr.122 PU communication check time interval for communication via the PU connector, Pr.336 RS-485 communication check time interval for communication via the RS-485 terminals, or Pr.1432 Ethernet communication check time interval for Ethernet communication.

Use the same settings for the inverter communication parameters (Pr.118 to Pr.120, Pr.124, Pr.332 to Pr.334, and Pr.341) and the FR Configurator2 communication settings.

Initial values are shown below.

*1 The parameter is valid only for the FR-A800 series, FR-A800 Plus series, and FR-F800 series. *2 The initial value for the FR-A800 series, FR-A800 Plus series, and FR-F800 series. *3 The initial value for the FR-E800 series.

NOTE Use the operation panel to change the settings of the inverter parameters. The operation panel and FR Configurator2

(personal computer) cannot be connected to the PU connector simultaneously. For details on inverter communication parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) of the inverter and the FR-

E800 Instruction Manual (Communication). For the setting method of the [Detailed setting] of the [System setting] window of FR Configurator2, refer to the Instruction Manual of FR Configurator2.

Parameter clear/All parameter clear clears communication parameter settings and may disable the communication with FR Configurator2 (Developer).

For the Ethernet communication, refer to the Ethernet Function Manual and FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Communication).

Item FR Configurator2 initial value

Inverter communication parameters Pr. Parameter name Initial value

Communication speed

19200(bps) 118 PU communication speed 192 (19200 bps) 332 RS-485 communication speed*1 96 (9600 bps)

Data length/Stop bit Data length : 8 bits Stop bit : 2 bits

119 PU communication stop bit length / data length

1 (data length: 8 bits, stop bit: 2 bits)

333 RS-485 communication stop bit length / data length*1

Parity Even 120 PU communication parity check 2 (with even parity check) 334 RS-485 communication parity check

selection*1

Communication check time interval

122 PU communication check time interval 9999 (without communication check)*2/ 0 (PU connector communication disabled)*3

336 RS-485 communication check time interval*1

0 (Changing to NET operation mode disabled)

1432 Ethernet communication check time interval

9999 (without communication check)

Delimiter CR 124 PU communication CR/LF selection 1 (CR) 341 RS-485 communication CR/LF selection*1

0 1. PLC FUNCTION 1.8 Prior to creating sequence programs

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1.8.5 Writing sequences programs

Sequence programs can be written in any operation mode (External operation mode, PU operation mode and Network operation mode). For the operation modes, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) of the inverter and the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).

Check the following points when rewriting the PLC function parameters and sequence programs using FR Configurator2 (Developer). (For the details, refer to the Instruction Manual of FR Configurator2.)

The sequence program execution status is in the STOP (SQ signal OFF) (refer to page 17). The inverter is stopped. If any incorrect setting exists, communication with FR Configurator2 (Developer) is disabled. Check the communication

parameter settings.

NOTE A sequence program cannot be written with its steps specified. The sequence program does not run if written in this way.

(The program outside the specified range is initialized.) To read the PLC function parameters and sequence programs from the inverter, such information must be written to the

inverter using FR Configurator2 (Developer) in advance. Always write the PLC function parameters and sequence program at least once as the inverter does not have valid data.

There is a limitation on the number of times writing can be done (approximately 100,000 times) as the PLC function parameters and sequence program are written to the flash memory.

A program with more than 6k steps (24k bytes) cannot be written.

211. PLC FUNCTION 1.8 Prior to creating sequence programs

2

1.9 Device map

1.9.1 I/O device map External input/output (FR-A800, FR-A800 Plus, and FR-F800 series)

*1 For the FR-F800 series, no function is assigned in the initial setting.

External input/output (For FR-A800/FR-A800 Plus series with FR-A8TP installed)

Device number

Name Remarks Device number

Name Remarks

External input/ output

X00 Terminal STF External terminal Y00 Terminal RUN External terminal X01 Terminal STR Y01 Terminal SU X02 Terminal RH Y02 Terminal IPF X03 Terminal RM Y03 Terminal OL X04 Terminal RL Y04 Terminal FU X05 Terminal JOG Y05 Terminal ABC1 X06 Terminal RT Y06 Terminal ABC2 X07 Terminal AU Y07 Empty (for temporary retention) X08 Terminal CS*1 Y08

X09 Terminal MRS Y09 X0A Terminal STP (STOP) Y0A X0B Terminal RES Y0B X0C Vacant (for temporary retention) Y0C X0D Y0D X0E Y0E X0F Y0F

Device number

Name Remarks Device number

Name Remarks

External input/ output

X00 Terminal STF External terminal Y00 Terminal RUN External terminal X01 Terminal STR Y01 Terminal SU X02 Terminal DI3 Y02 Terminal IPF X03 Terminal DI2 Y03 Empty (for temporary retention) X04 Terminal DI1 Y04 X05 Terminal DI4 Y05 Terminal ABC1 External terminal X06 Empty (for temporary retention) Y06 Empty (for temporary retention) X07 Always OH External terminal Y07 X08 Empty (for temporary retention) Y08 X09 Y09 X0A Y0A X0B Terminal RES External terminal Y0B X0C Vacant (for temporary retention) Y0C X0D Y0D X0E Y0E X0F Y0F

2 1. PLC FUNCTION 1.9 Device map

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

I/O device map Device number

Name Remarks Device number

Name Remarks

Plug-in option I/ O

X10 Terminal X0 16 bits digital input FR-A8AX

Y10 Terminal DO0 Digital output FR-A8AYX11 Terminal X1 Y11 Terminal DO1

X12 Terminal X2 Y12 Terminal DO2 X13 Terminal X3 Y13 Terminal DO3 X14 Terminal X4 Y14 Terminal DO4 X15 Terminal X5 Y15 Terminal DO5 X16 Terminal X6 Y16 Terminal DO6 X17 Terminal X7 Y17 Terminal RA1 Relay output

FR-A8ARX18 Terminal X8 Y18 Terminal RA2 X19 Terminal X9 Y19 Terminal RA3 X1A Terminal X10 Y1A Empty (for temporary retention) X1B Terminal X11 Y1B X1C Terminal X12 Y1C X1D Terminal X13 Y1D X1E Terminal X14 Y1E X1F Terminal X15 Y1F

System I/O

X20 Operation mode setting read complete

SD1140 Y20 Operation mode setting read command

SD1140

X21 Set frequency read complete (RAM)

SD1141 Y21 Set frequency read command (RAM)

SD1141

X22 Set frequency read complete (EEPROM)

SD1142 Y22 Set frequency read command (EEPROM)

SD1142

X23 Operation mode setting write complete

SD1143 Y23 Operation mode setting write command

SD1143

X24 Set frequency write complete (RAM)

SD1144 Y24 Set frequency write command (RAM)

SD1144

X25 Set frequency write complete (EEPROM)

SD1145 Y25 Set frequency write command (EEPROM)

SD1145

X26 Fault record batch clear complete

SD1146 Y26 Fault record batch clear command

SD1146

X27 Parameter clear complete SD1147 Y27 Parameter clear command

SD1147

X28 Parameter read complete (RAM)

SD1241, SD1242, SD1234

Y28 Parameter read request (RAM)

SD1241, SD1242, SD1234

X29 Parameter write complete (RAM)

Y29 Parameter write request (RAM)

X2A Parameter read complete (EEPROM)

SD1243, SD1244, SD1235

Y2A Parameter read request (EEPROM)

SD1243, SD1244, SD1235

X2B Parameter write complete (EEPROM)

Y2B Parameter write request (EEPROM)

X2C User parameter read complete (RAM)

D206 to D255 (Pr.1150 to Pr.1199)

Y2C User parameter read (RAM)

D206 to D255 (Pr.1150 to Pr.1199)

X2D User parameter write complete (RAM)

Y2D User parameter write (RAM)

X2E User parameter read complete (EEPROM)

Y2E User parameter read (EEPROM)

X2F User parameter write complete (EEPROM)

Y2F User parameter write (EEPROM)

231. PLC FUNCTION 1.9 Device map

2

CC-Link I/O Remote I/O

X30 RY0 Refer to page 77. Y30 RX0 Refer to page 77. X31 RY1 Y31 RX1 X32 RY2 Y32 RX2 X33 RY3 Y33 RX3 X34 RY4 Y34 RX4 X35 RY5 Y35 RX5 X36 RY6 Y36 RX6 X37 RY7 Y37 RX7 X38 RY8 Y38 RX8 X39 RY9 Y39 RX9 X3A RYA Y3A RXA X3B RYB Y3B RXB X3C RYC Y3C RXC X3D RYD Y3D RXD X3E RYE Y3E RXE X3F RYF Y3F RXF

Device number

Name Remarks Device number

Name Remarks

4 1. PLC FUNCTION 1.9 Device map

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

FR-E800 series Device number

Name Remarks Device number

Name Remarks

External input/ output

X00 Terminal STF*1*4 External terminal Y00 Terminal RUN*3*4 External terminal

X01 Terminal STR*2*4 Y01 Empty (for temporary retention)

X02 Terminal RH*3*4 Y02 Terminal NET Y1 NET terminal

X03 Terminal RM*3*4 Y03 Empty (for temporary retention)

X04 Terminal RL*3*4 Y04 Terminal FU*3*4 External terminal

X05 Vacant (for temporary retention) Y05 Terminal ABC X06 Y06 Terminal NET Y2 NET terminal X07 Y07 Terminal NET Y3 X08 Terminal NET X1 NET terminal Y08 Terminal NET Y4 X09 Terminal MRS*3*4 External terminal Y09 Empty (for temporary retention)

X0A Terminal NET X2 NET terminal Y0A X0B Terminal RES*3*4 External terminal Y0B

X0C Terminal NET X3 NET terminal Y0C X0D Terminal NET X4 Y0D X0E Terminal NET X5 Y0E X0F Vacant (for temporary retention) Y0F

Plug-in option I/ O

X10 Terminal X0 16 bits digital input FR-A8AX

Y10 Terminal DO0 Digital output FR-A8AYX11 Terminal X1 Y11 Terminal DO1

X12 Terminal X2 Y12 Terminal DO2 X13 Terminal X3 Y13 Terminal DO3 X14 Terminal X4 Y14 Terminal DO4 X15 Terminal X5 Y15 Terminal DO5 X16 Terminal X6 Y16 Terminal DO6 X17 Terminal X7 Y17 Terminal RA1 Relay output

FR-A8ARX18 Terminal X8 Y18 Terminal RA2 X19 Terminal X9 Y19 Terminal RA3 X1A Terminal X10 Y1A Empty (for temporary retention) X1B Terminal X11 Y1B X1C Terminal X12 Y1C X1D Terminal X13 Y1D X1E Terminal X14 Y1E X1F Terminal X15 Y1F

251. PLC FUNCTION 1.9 Device map

2

*1 Terminal DI0 for FR-E800-E. *2 Terminal DI1 for FR-E800-E. *3 Empty (for temporary retention) for FR-E800-E. *4 Empty (for temporary retention) for FR-E800-SCE.

System I/O

X20 Operation mode setting read complete

SD1140 Y20 Operation mode setting read command

SD1140

X21 Set frequency read complete (RAM)

SD1141 Y21 Set frequency read command (RAM)

SD1141

X22 Set frequency read complete (EEPROM)

SD1142 Y22 Set frequency read command (EEPROM)

SD1142

X23 Operation mode setting write complete

SD1143 Y23 Operation mode setting write command

SD1143

X24 Set frequency write complete (RAM)

SD1144 Y24 Set frequency write command (RAM)

SD1144

X25 Set frequency write complete (EEPROM)

SD1145 Y25 Set frequency write command (EEPROM)

SD1145

X26 Fault record batch clear complete

SD1146 Y26 Fault record batch clear command

SD1146

X27 Parameter clear complete SD1147 Y27 Parameter clear command

SD1147

X28 Parameter read complete (RAM)

SD1241, SD1242, SD1234

Y28 Parameter read request (RAM)

SD1241, SD1242, SD1234

X29 Parameter write complete (RAM)

Y29 Parameter write request (RAM)

X2A Parameter read complete (EEPROM)

SD1243, SD1244, SD1235

Y2A Parameter read request (EEPROM)

SD1243, SD1244, SD1235

X2B Parameter write complete (EEPROM)

Y2B Parameter write request (EEPROM)

X2C User parameter read complete (RAM)

D206 to D255 (Pr.1150 to Pr.1199)

Y2C User parameter read (RAM)

D206 to D255 (Pr.1150 to Pr.1199)

X2D User parameter write complete (RAM)

Y2D User parameter write (RAM)

X2E User parameter read complete (EEPROM)

Y2E User parameter read (EEPROM)

X2F User parameter write complete (EEPROM)

Y2F User parameter write (EEPROM)

CC-Link I/O Remote I/O

X30 RY0 Refer to page 77. Y30 RX0 Refer to page 77. X31 RY1 Y31 RX1 X32 RY2 Y32 RX2 X33 RY3 Y33 RX3 X34 RY4 Y34 RX4 X35 RY5 Y35 RX5 X36 RY6 Y36 RX6 X37 RY7 Y37 RX7 X38 RY8 Y38 RX8 X39 RY9 Y39 RX9 X3A RYA Y3A RXA X3B RYB Y3B RXB X3C RYC Y3C RXC X3D RYD Y3D RXD X3E RYE Y3E RXE X3F RYF Y3F RXF

Device number

Name Remarks Device number

Name Remarks

6 1. PLC FUNCTION 1.9 Device map

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1.9.2 Ethernet I/O device map (master)

1.9.3 Ethernet I/O device map (slave)

1.9.4 Internal relay (M) device map

1.9.5 Data register (D) device map

Device No. Name Remarks Device No. Name Remarks X40 to X4F Inverter-to-inverter link input

(from slave 1 to master) Ethernet Y40 to Y4F Inverter-to-inverter link output

(from master to slave 1) Ethernet

X50 to X5F Inverter-to-inverter link input (from slave 2 to master)

Y50 to Y5F Inverter-to-inverter link output (from master to slave 2)

X60 to X6F Inverter-to-inverter link input (from slave 3 to master)

Y60 to Y6F Inverter-to-inverter link output (from master to slave 3)

X70 to X7F Inverter-to-inverter link input (from slave 4 to master)

Y70 to Y7F Inverter-to-inverter link output (from master to slave 4)

X80 to X8F Inverter-to-inverter link input (from slave 5 to master)

Y80 to Y8F Inverter-to-inverter link output (from master to slave 5)

Device No. Name Remarks Device No. Name Remarks X40 to X4F Inverter-to-inverter link input

(from master to slave) Ethernet Y40 to Y4F Inverter-to-inverter link output

(from slave to master) Ethernet

Device number Description M0 to M127 Available for users.

Device number Description Refer to page

D0 to D205 Available for users.

D206 to D255 Pr.1150 to Pr.1199 Parameters for user setting. Available for users.

64

271. PLC FUNCTION 1.9 Device map

2

1.9.6 Special relay Special relay is an internal relay whose application is already determined in the PLC function. Therefore, do not turn ON/OFF the special relay in the program.

Device number

Name Description Supported model A800 (Plus)

F800 E800

SM0 Diagnostic error Turned ON when a diagnostic error has been detected. ON status is retained even after the condition becomes normal.

SM1 Self-diagnostic error

Turned ON when an error is detected by self diagnosis. ON status is retained even after the condition becomes normal.

SM5 Common error information

When SM5 is turned ON, common error information (SD5 to SD15) is stored.

SM16 Individual error information

When SM16 is turned ON, individual error information (SD16 to SD26) is stored.

SM56 Operation error flag Turned ON when an operation error is detected during instruction execution. ON status is retained even after the condition becomes normal.

SM210 Clock data setting request

At OFF to ON of SM210, the clock data stored in SD210 to SD213 are written to the inverter.

SM211 Clock data error Turned ON when the clock data (SD210 to SD213) has an error or is not a BCD value.

SM213 Clock data read request

Clock data is read and stored as BCD value in SD210 to SD213 when this relay is turned ON. The process is not executed when the relay is OFF.

SM400 Always ON SM400 and SM401 are respectively turned ON and OFF regardless of the STOP and RUN statuses.

SM401 Always OFF

SM402 ON only for one scan after RUN

SM402 and SM403 change depending on the STOP and RUN statuses. In the cases other than STOP: SM402 is ON only for one scan. SM403 is OFF only for one scan.

SM403 OFF only for one scan after RUN

SM1200 Inverter operating status control flag (STF)

Flag used for controlling the inverter terminal STF.*1*5

Inverter operating status control flag (DI0)

Flag used for controlling the inverter terminal DI0.*1*6

SM1201 Inverter operating status control flag (STR)

Flag used for controlling the inverter terminal STR.*2*5

Inverter operating status control flag (DI1)

Flag used for controlling the inverter terminal DI1.*2*6

SM1202 Inverter operating status control flag (RH/DI3*7)

Flag used for controlling the inverter terminal RH/DI3.

SM1203 Inverter operating status control flag (RM/DI2*7)

Flag used for controlling the inverter terminal RM/DI2.

SM1204 Inverter operating status control flag (RL/DI1*7)

Flag used for controlling the inverter terminal RL./DI1.

SM1205 Inverter operating status control flag (JOG/DI4*7)

Flag used for controlling the inverter terminal JOG/DI4.

SM1206 Inverter operating status control flag (RT)

Flag used for controlling the inverter terminal RT.

SM1207 Inverter operating status control flag (AU)

Flag used for controlling the inverter terminal AU.

8 1. PLC FUNCTION 1.9 Device map

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

SM1208 Inverter operating status control flag (CS)*4

Flag used for controlling the inverter terminal CS.

Inverter operating status control flag (NET X1)

Flag used for controlling the inverter terminal NET X1.

SM1209 Inverter operating status control flag (MRS)

Flag used for controlling the inverter terminal MRS.

SM1210 Inverter operating status control flag STP (STOP)

Flag used for controlling the inverter terminal STP (STOP).

Inverter operating status control flag (NET X2)

Flag used for controlling the inverter terminal NET X2.

SM1211 Inverter operating status control flag (RES)

Flag used for controlling the inverter terminal RES.

SM1212 Inverter operating status control flag (NET X3)

Flag used for controlling the inverter terminal NET X3.

SM1213 Inverter operating status control flag (NET X4)

Flag used for controlling the inverter terminal NET X4.

SM1214 Inverter operating status control flag (NET X5)

Flag used for controlling the inverter terminal NET X5.

SM1216 Inverter status (RUN)

Inverter running

SM1217 Inverter status (FWD)

Forward rotation

SM1218 Inverter status (REV)

Reverse rotation

SM1219 Inverter status (SU) Up to frequency

SM1220 Inverter status (OL) Overload alarm

SM1221 Inverter status (IPF)

Instantaneous power failure/undervoltage

SM1222 Inverter status (FU) Output frequency detection

SM1223 Inverter status (ALM)

Fault output

SM1224 Inverter status (LF) Warning output

SM1225 Inverter status (DO0)

Stores the operating status of an output terminal function assigned by Pr.313.*3

SM1226 Inverter status (DO1)

Stores the operating status of an output terminal function assigned by Pr.314.*3

SM1227 Inverter status (DO2)

Stores the operating status of an output terminal function assigned by Pr.315.*3

SM1228 Inverter status (DO3)

Stores the operating status of an output terminal function assigned by Pr.316.*3

SM1229 Inverter status (DO4)

Stores the operating status of an output terminal function assigned by Pr.317.*3

SM1230 Inverter status (DO5)

Stores the operating status of an output terminal function assigned by Pr.318.*3

SM1231 Inverter status (DO0)

Stores the operating status of an output terminal function assigned by Pr.319.*3

SM1232 Inverter status (RA1)

Stores the operating status of an output terminal function assigned by Pr.320.*3

SM1233 Inverter status (RA2)

Stores the operating status of an output terminal function assigned by Pr.321.*3

Device number

Name Description Supported model A800 (Plus)

F800 E800

291. PLC FUNCTION 1.9 Device map

3

*1 Always set to the STF signal in the Network operation mode. Changing the function with Pr.178 is disabled. *2 Always set to the STR signal in the Network operation mode. Changing the function with Pr.179 is disabled. *3 Even if the FR-A8AY or FR-A8AR is not installed, Pr.313 to Pr.322 are accessible during PLC function operation, and the operating status of the

output terminal (virtual output terminal) function is stored in each device. *4 For the FR-F800 series, no function is assigned in the initial setting. *5 Available only for the RS-485 model. *6 Available only for the Ethernet model. *7 The terminal name is the one used when the FR-A8TP is installed to the FR-A800/FR-A800 Plus series inverter.

SM1234 Inverter status (RA3)

Stores the operating status of an output terminal function assigned by Pr.322.*3

SM1235 Safety monitor (terminal SO)

The safety monitor (terminal SO) status is stored. This is turned ON when no internal safety circuit failure has occurred.

SM1236 Inverter status (NET Y1)

Stores the operating status of an output terminal function assigned by Pr.193.

SM1237 Inverter status (NET Y2)

Stores the operating status of an output terminal function assigned by Pr.194.

SM1238 Inverter status (NET Y3)

Stores the operating status of an output terminal function assigned by Pr.195.

SM1239 Inverter status (NET Y4)

Stores the operating status of an output terminal function assigned by Pr.196.

SM1255 Inverter operating status control selection

Select the inverter operating status of SM1200 to SM1211 and SD1148. OFF: Special relay selection ON: Special register selection

SM1256 2-word parameter access notice

Turned ON when parameter read for the inverter is executed using X28 to X2B, Y28 to Y2B, and the object was 2-word parameter. OFF: Read is completed as 1-word parameter. ON: Read is completed as 2-word parameter.

SM1257 2-word parameter access setting

Set the object as 2 word parameter when inverter parameter write is executed using X28 to X2B, Y28 to Y2B. OFF: Carries out writing as 1-word parameter. ON: Carries out writing as 2-word parameter.

SM1258 Clock data setting completion flag

Turned ON when the clock data is set using an external peripheral device, parameter, or SM210. This is turned OFF when SM213 is turned ON.

Device number

Name Description Supported model A800 (Plus)

F800 E800

0 1. PLC FUNCTION 1.9 Device map

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1.9.7 Special register Special register is a data register in which the application is already determined in the PLC function. Therefore, do not write data into the special register on the program.

Device number

Name Description Page Supported model A800 A800

Plus F800 E800

SD0 Self-diagnostic error Error code is stored when an error is detected by self diagnosis.

46

SD1 Clock time for diagnosis error occurrence

The year (the last two digits of the year) and the month when the SD0 data is updated are stored in 2-digit BCD code.

SD2 The day and the hour when the SD0 data is updated are stored in 2-digit BCD code.

SD3 The minute and the second when the SD0 data is updated are stored in 2-digit BCD code.

SD4 Error information category

Stores the category codes that show the type of error information stored in the common information (SD5 to SD15) and the individual information (SD16 to SD26).

The following codes are stored in the common information category code.

The following codes are stored in the individual information category code.

SD5 to SD15

Common error information

When the common information category code is 2, the file name or drive name are stored in SD5 to SD11.

The step numbers where errors occurred are stored in SD14 and SD15.

S pe

ci al

re gi

st er

Year (0 to 99) Month (1 to 12)

b15 b8 b7 b0to to

Day (1 to 31) Hour (0 to 23)

b15 b8 b7 b0to to

Minute (0 to 59) Second (0 to 59)

b15 b8 b7 b0to to

Individual error information Common error information

b15 b8 b7 b0to to

Value Code 0 2 3 4

Not used File name/drive name Time (setting value) Program error location

Value Code 0 3 5

Not used Time (actual measurement value) Parameter number

Number Description SD5 SD6 SD7 SD8

Drive name. File name (ASCII code: 8 characters)

SD9 SD10 SD11

Extension (ASCII code: 3 characters)

2EH(.)

SD12 to SD15

Empty

311. PLC FUNCTION 1.9 Device map

3

SD5 to SD15

Common error information

When the common information category code is 3, the time (setting value) is stored in SD5 and SD6.

SD5 to SD15

Common error information

When the common information category code is 4, the program error location is stored in SD5 to SD15.

The step numbers where errors occurred are stored in SD14 and SD15.

SD16 to SD26

Individual error information

When the individual information category code is 3, the time (actual measured data) is stored in SD16 and SD17.

When the individual information category code is 5, the parameter number is stored in SD16.

SD200 Switch state When the SQ signal input via an external terminal or terminal NET is valid for operation, the commanded state is reflected.

SD203 CPU module operating status

Device number

Name Description Page Supported model A800 A800

Plus F800 E800

S pe

ci al

re gi

st er

Number Description SD5 SD6

Time: in 1 s increments (0 to 999 s) Time: in 1 ms increments (0 to 65535 ms)

SD7 to SD15

Empty

Number Description SD5 SD6 SD7 SD8

File name MAIN *1 (ASCII code: 8 characters)

SD9 SD10 SD11

Extension QPG Always 0

2EH(.) (ASCII code: 3 characters)

SD12 Always 0 SD13 Always 0 SD14 Sequence step No.(L) SD15 Sequence step No.(H)

Number Description SD16 SD17

Time: in 1 s increments (0 to 999 s) Time: in 1 ms increments (0 to 65535 ms)

SD18 to SD26

Empty

Number Description SD16 Parameter number SD17 to SD26

Empty

bit Value DescriptionItem b0 CPU switch

(SQ signal) state 0 1

RUN STOP

bit Value DescriptionItem b3 to b0

b7 to b4

CPU module operating status

STOP/RUN factor

0 2 0 1 2

4

RUN STOP Switch Remote contact

Stop error

Remote operation from the peripheral S/W for the programmable controller

2 1. PLC FUNCTION 1.9 Device map

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

SD210 Clock data Year (the last two digits of the year) is stored in BCD code.

SD211 Clock data Minute and second are stored in BCD code.

SD212 Clock data Minute and second are stored in BCD code.

SD213 Clock data Year (the first two digits of the year) and day of the week are stored in BCD code.

SD286 Device assignment

Number of points assigned for M (for extension)

Always 8192

SD287

SD288 Number of points assigned for B (for extension)

Always 8192

SD289

SD290 Number of points assigned for X

Always 8192

SD291 Number of points assigned for Y

Always 8192

SD292 Number of points assigned for M

Always 8192

SD293 Number of points assigned for L

Always 8192

SD294 Number of points assigned for B

Always 8192

SD295 Number of points assigned for F

Always 2048

Device number

Name Description Page Supported model A800 A800

Plus F800 E800

S pe

ci al

re gi

st er

Last two digits of the year Month

Day of the week Hour

Minute Second

First two digits of the year

Day Sunday Monday Tuesday

Wednesday Thursday

Friday Saturday

S pe

ci al

re gi

st er

331. PLC FUNCTION 1.9 Device map

3

SD296 Device assignment

Number of points assigned for SB

Always 2048

SD297 Number of points assigned for V

Always 2048

SD298 Number of points assigned for S

Always 8192

SD299 Number of points assigned for T

Always 2048

SD300 Number of points assigned for ST

The number of points currently set for ST (0 to 16 or 0 to 32) is stored. The number of settable points differs depending on the inverter. For details, refer to page 8.

SD301 Number of points assigned for C

Always 1024

SD302 Number of points assigned for D

Always 12288

SD303 Number of points assigned for W

Always 8192

SD304 Number of points assigned for SW

Always 2048

SD305 Number of points assigned for Z

Always 20

SD306 Number of points assigned for ZR

Always 0

SD307

SD308 Number of points assigned for D

Always 12288

SD309

SD310 Number of points assigned for W

Always 8192

SD311

SD520 Current scan time Scan time is stored at every END, and is constantly updated. (Measured in 100 s increments) SD520: Stores the millisecond places (Stored range: 0 to 65535) SD521: Stores the microsecond places (Stored range: 0 to 900)

SD521

Device number

Name Description Page Supported model A800 A800

Plus F800 E800

S pe

ci al

re gi

st er

4 1. PLC FUNCTION 1.9 Device map

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

SD524 Minimum scan time Minimum scan time is stored at every END. (Measured in 100 s increments) SD524: Stores the millisecond places (Stored range: 0 to 65535) SD525: Stores the microsecond places (Stored range: 0 to 900)

SD525

SD526 Maximum scan time Maximum scan time is stored at every END. (Measured in 100 s increments) SD526: Stores the millisecond places (Stored range: 0 to 65535) SD527: Stores the microsecond places (Stored range: 0 to 900)

SD527

SD1062 to SD1093

Remote register Special register for communicating with the master station in CC-Link.

77

SD1133 Output frequency monitor Present output frequency is stored. The increment is 0.01 Hz.*11

44

SD1134 Output current monitor Present output current is stored. The increment is 0.01 A. SD1135 Output voltage monitor Present output current is stored. The increment is 0.01 A. SD1136 Fault record 1, 2 Faults in the inverter are stored in the order of occurrence. 44

SD1137 Fault record 3, 4

SD1138 Fault record 5, 6

SD1139 Fault record 7, 8

SD1140 Operation mode setting read

Stores the present operation mode. 48

SD1141 Set frequency read (RAM)

Reads and stores the set frequency (RAM).*11 48

SD1142 Set frequency read (EEPROM)

Reads and stores the set frequency (EEPROM).*11 49

SD1143 Operation mode setting write

Sets the operation mode to be changed. 51

SD1144 Set frequency write (RAM)

Sets the running frequency (RAM).*11 52

SD1145 Set frequency write (EEPROM)

Sets the running frequency (EEPROM).*11 53

SD1146 Fault record batch clear Clears the fault history when H9696 is written. 54

SD1147 Parameter clear H9696 write: parameter clear H9966 write: all clear H5A5A write: parameter clear except for communication parameters H55AA write: all clear except for communication parameters

54

Device number

Name Description Page Supported model A800 A800

Plus F800 E800

S pe

ci al

re gi

st er

S pe

ci al

re gi

st er

fo r c

on tro

l

351. PLC FUNCTION 1.9 Device map

3

SD1148 Inverter operating status control

Turn ON/OFF the corresponding bit to control the inverter operating status. All initial values are set as "0". When SM1255 is OFF, this function is disabled.

For FR-A800/FR-A800 Plus/FR-F800 series

For FR-A800/FR-A800 Plus series with FR-A8TP installed

For FR-E800 series

55

SD1149 Inverter operating status control enable/disable setting

The inverter operating status control by SD1148 and SM1200 to SM1211 can be enabled/disabled by turning ON/OFF the corresponding bit. The bit table is the same as SD1148. All initial values are set to "0" (invalid). Input through external terminals is always enabled for the SQ signal. (The SQ signal cannot be controlled with SD1149 bits.)

56

SD1150 Inverter parameter access error

Stores the error number generated when parameter or data stored in the special register was not successfully reflected to the inverter.

57

Device number

Name Description Page Supported model A800 A800

Plus F800 E800

S pe

ci al

re gi

st er

fo r c

on tro

l

b15 b12 b11 b8 b7 b4 b3 b0 0: OFF 1: ON

STF STR RH RM RL JOG RT AU CS MRS STP (STOP) RES

Invalid *2 *3

b15 b12 b11 b8 b7 b4 b3 b0 0: OFF 1: ON

STF STR DI3 DI2 DI1 DI4

OH

RES

Invalid *2 *3

b15 b12 b11 b8 b7 b4 b3 b0 0: OFF 1: ON

STF/DI0 STR/DI1 RH RM RL

Invalid

NET X1 MRS NET X2 RES NET X3 NET X4 NET X5

*2 *3

Invalid

6 1. PLC FUNCTION 1.9 Device map

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

SD1151 Inverter status Operating status of the inverter is stored. 57

SD1152 Frequency setting value The set frequency is stored.*11

SD1153 Running speed 1 (0.1) r/min increments Pr.811 Set resolution switchover enables 0.1 r/min unit indication*4

SD1154 Motor torque 0.1% increments

SD1155 Converter output voltage 0.1 V increments

SD1156 Regenerative brake duty 0.1% increments

SD1157 Electric thermal relay load factor

0.1% increments

SD1158 Output power peak value 0.01 A increments

SD1159 Converter output voltage peak value

0.1 V increments

SD1160 Input power 0.01 kW increments

SD1161 Output power 0.01 kW increments

SD1162 Input terminal status Details of input terminal status

For FR-A800/FR-A800 Plus/FR-F800 series

For FR-A800/FR-A800 Plus series with FR-A8TP installed

For FR-E800 series

Device number

Name Description Page Supported model A800 A800

Plus F800 E800

S pe

ci al

re gi

st er

fo r c

on tro

l

b15 b8 b7 b4 b3 b0 0: OFF 1: ON

Inverter running (RUN) Forward running Reverse running Up to frequency (SU) Overload alarm (OL) Instantaneous power failure /undervoltage (IPF) *7

Output frequency detection (FU) Fault output (ALM) Alarm output (LF)

Terminal SO status

b15 b12 b11 b8b7 b4b3 b0 0:OFF 1:ON STF STR AU RT RL RM RH JOG MRS STP(STOP) RES CS

b15 b12 b11 b8b7 b4b3 b0 0:OFF 1:ON STF STR OH

DI3 DI2 DI1 DI4

RES

b15 b12 b11 b8b7 b4b3 b0 0:OFF 1:ON STF STR

RL RM RH

MRS

RES

371. PLC FUNCTION 1.9 Device map

3

SD1163 Output terminal status Details of output terminal status

For FR-A800/FR-A800 Plus/FR-F800 series

For FR-A800/FR-A800 Plus series with FR-A8TP installed

For FR-E800 series

SD1164 Load meter Stores the load meter. 0.1% increments

SD1165 Motor excitation current 0.01 A increments

SD1166 Position pulse Stores the encoder position pulse

Analog output signal for dancer tension control

Stores the dancer tension command *5

SD1167 Cumulative energization time

1 hour increments

SD1168 Ideal speed command 0.01 Hz increments*11

SD1169 Orientation status Stores the orientation status.

Winding length Stores the winding length. *5

SD1170 Actual operation time 1 hour increments

SD1171 Motor load factor 0.1% increments

SD1172 Cumulative power 1 kWh increments

SD1173 Position command (lower 16 bits)

Stores the position command setting value (lower 16 bits). *8 *8

Line speed command Stores the line speed command. *5

SD1174 Position command (upper 16 bits)

Stores the position command setting value (upper 16 bits). (monitor range: 0 to 65535)*9

(monitor range: -2147483647 to 2147483647)*10

*8 *8

Actual line speed Stores the actual line speed. *5

SD1175 Current position (lower 16 bits)

Stores the position feedback pulse value (lower 16 bits). (monitor range: 0 to 65535)*9

*8 *8

Dancer compensation speed

Stores the dancer compensation speed *5

SD1176 Current position (upper 16 bits)

Stores the position feedback pulse value (upper 16 bits). (monitor range: 0 to 65535)*9

(monitor range: -2147483647 to 2147483647)*10

*8 *8

Winding length Stores the winding length. *5

SD1177 Droop pulse (lower 16 bits)

Stores the droop pulse value (lower 16 bits). (monitor range: 0 to 65535)*9

*8 *8

Analog output signal 2 for dancer tension control

Stores the dancer tension command. *5

Device number

Name Description Page Supported model A800 A800

Plus F800 E800

S pe

ci al

re gi

st er

fo r c

on tro

l

b15 b7 b4b3 b0 0:OFF 1:ON

RUN SU IPF OL FU ABC1 ABC2 So (SO)

b15 b7 b4b3 b0 0:OFF 1:ON

RUN SU IPF

ABC1

So (SO)

b15 b7 b4b3 b0 0:OFF 1:ON

RUN

FU ABC1

8 1. PLC FUNCTION 1.9 Device map

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

SD1178 Droop pulse (upper 16 bits)

Stores the droop pulse value (upper 16 bits). (monitor range: 0 to 65535)*9

(monitor range: -2147483647 to 2147483647)*10

*8 *8

Line speed pulse monitor Stores the pulse train input *5

SD1179 Torque command 0.1% increments

SD1180 Torque current command 0.1% increments

SD1181 Motor output 0.1 kW increments

SD1182 Feedback pulse Stores the feedback pulse quantity.

SD1183 SSCNET III communication status

Stores the SSCNET III communication status.

SD1184 Station number (PU connector)

Stores the station number (PU connector).

SD1185 Station number (RS-485 terminal block)

Stores the station number (RS-485 terminal block).

SD1186 Station number (CC- Link)

Stores the communication station number (CC-Link).

SD1187 Remote output 1 Stores the analog remote output setting value 1.

SD1188 Remote output 2 Stores the analog remote output setting value 2.

SD1189 Remote output 3 Stores the analog remote output setting value 3.

SD1190 Remote output 4 Stores the analog remote output setting value 4.

SD1191 PTC thermistor resistance value

Stores the PTC thermistor resistance value.

SD1192 Control circuit temperature

Stores the control circuit temperature. The increment is 1C.

SD1193 Cumulative pulse The cumulative number of pulses is displayed (monitor range: -32767 to 32767) (For the vector control compatible plug-in option).

SD1194 Cumulative pulse overflow times

The number of the cumulative pulse overflow times is displayed(monitor range: -32767 to 32767) (For the vector control compatible plug-in option).

SD1195 Cumulative pulse (control terminal option)

The cumulative number of pulses is displayed (monitor range: -32767 to 32767) (For the vector control compatible control terminal option).

SD1196 Cumulative pulse overflow times (control terminal option)

The number of the cumulative pulse overflow times is displayed(monitor range: -32767 to 32767) (For the vector control compatible control terminal option)

SD1197 Energy saving effect According to the parameter settings.

SD1198 Cumulative energy saving

SD1199 PID set point Stores the PID set point. The increment is 0.1%.

SD1200 PID measured value Stores the PID measured value. The increment is 0.1%.

SD1201 PID deviation Stores the PID deviation. The increment is 0.1%.

SD1202 Second PID set point Stores the second PID set point. The increment is 0.1%.

SD1203 Second PID measured value

Stores the second PID measured value. The increment is 0.1%.

SD1204 Second PID deviation Stores the second PID deviation. The increment is 0.1%.

Device number

Name Description Page Supported model A800 A800

Plus F800 E800

S pe

ci al

re gi

st er

fo r c

on tro

l

391. PLC FUNCTION 1.9 Device map

4

SD1205 Option input terminal status 1

Stores the input status of the FR-A8AX. All are OFF (0) when there are no options installed.

SD1206 Option input terminal status 2

SD1207 Option output terminal status

Stores the output status of the FR-A8AY or FR-A8AR. All are OFF (0) when there are no options installed.

SD1208 Emergency drive status Stores the emergency drive status number.

Winding diameter compensation torque command

Stores the commanded torque after winding diameter compensation.

*5

SD1209 Current position 2 (lower 16 bits)

Stores the lower 16 bits of the current position 2 value.

Inertia compensation Stores the inertia compensation torque. *5

SD1210 Current position 2 (upper 16 bits)

Stores the upper 16 bits of the current position 2 value.

Mechanical loss compensation

Stores the mechanical loss compensation. *5

SD1211 Dancer main speed setting

Stores the dancer main speed setting.*11

Winding diameter compensation speed

Stores the Winding diameter compensation speed. *5

SD1212 PID manipulated amount Stores the PID manipulated amount. The increment is 0.1%.

SD1213 PID measured value 2 Stores the PID measured value. The increment is 0.1%. (Monitoring can be performed even when PID control is disabled.)

SD1214 User definition error An inverter fault is initiated by setting the values of "16 to 20" in SD1214.

57

SD1215 Monitor setting selection Set SD1215 to display the monitor set in SD1216 to SD1218.

58

SD1216 Monitor 1 setting value The first to the third monitors on the operation panel can be changed by setting the value "40 to 42" in Pr.774 to Pr.776.

58

SD1217 Monitor 2 setting value

SD1218 Monitor 3 setting value

SD1220 Motor thermal load factor Stores the motor thermal load factor.

SD1221 Inverter thermal load factor

Stores the inverter thermal load factor.

SD1222 Second PID manipulated amount

Stores the second PID manipulated amount. The increment is 0.1%.

Device number

Name Description Page Supported model A800 A800

Plus F800 E800

S pe

ci al

re gi

st er

fo r c

on tro

l

SD1205 0:OFF 1:ON X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 X10 X11 X12 X13 X14 X15

b15 b12 b11 b8b7 b4b3 b0

b15 b12 b11 b8b7 b4b3 b0 SD1206 0:OFF

1:ON

DY

b15 b12 b11 b8b7 b4b3 b0 0:OFF 1:ON

Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 RA1 RA2 RA3

0 1. PLC FUNCTION 1.9 Device map

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

SD1223 Second PID measured value 2

Stores the second PID measured value. The increment is 0.1%. (Monitoring can be performed even when PID control is disabled.)

SD1224 32-bit cumulative power (Lower 16 bits)

1kWh

SD1225 32-bit cumulative power (Upper 16 bits)

1kWh

SD1226 32-bit cumulative power (Lower 16 bits)

0.01kWh/0.1kWh *6

SD1227 32-bit cumulative power (Upper 16 bits)

0.01kWh/0.1kWh *6

SD1228 BACnet reception status Stores the reception status of BACnet communication.

Tension command after taper compensation

Stores the commanded tension after taper compensation. *5

SD1229 Trace status Stores the trace status.

SD1230 Multi-revolution counter Stores the multi-revolution encoder counter value when the FR-A8APS is used.

SD1234 Second parameter change (RAM)

When setting a calibration parameter (bias/gain) H00: Frequency (torque) H01: Analog value set by parameters H02: Analog value input from terminals

61, 62

SD1235 Second parameter change (EEPROM)

SD1236 Pulse train input sampling pulse

The number of pulses counted in count cycle is stored. (0 to 32767)

67

SD1237 Pulse train input cumulative count value L

The cumulative value of the number of sampling pulses is stored. (0 to 99999999)

SD1238 Pulse train input cumulative count value H

SD1239 Reset request of pulse train input count

The sampling pulses and cumulative count value are cleared. Automatically changes to "0" after reset. (1: count clear)

SD1240 Count start of the pulse train input

Start counting the sampling pulses and cumulative count value. (0: count stop, 1: count start)

SD1241 Parameter number (RAM)

Set the parameter number to read from/write to the inverter.

61, 62

SD1242 Parameter content (RAM)

Stores the inverter parameter content (RAM value) specified by SD1241. Input the parameter setting value when writing the parameters.

SD1243 Parameter number (EEPROM)

Set the parameter number to read from/write to the inverter.

SD1244 Parameter content (EEPROM)

Stores the inverter parameter content (EEPROM value) specified by SD1243. Input the parameter setting value when writing the parameters.

SD1245 Terminal 1 input Stores the analog input value (0.1% increments) to terminal 1.

66

SD1246 Terminal 2 input Stores the analog input value (0.1% increments) to terminal 2.

SD1247 Terminal 4 input Stores the analog input value (0.1% increments) to terminal 4.

SD1248 PID control set point/ deviation

Set the PID set point or PID deviation. (0.01% increments) 68

SD1249 PID control measured value

Set the PID measured value. (0.01% increments)

SD1250 PID control manipulated amount

Stores the PID manipulated amount. (0.01% increments)

SD1251 Terminal FM/CA output When Pr.54 = "70", analog output can be performed from the terminal FM/CA. (0.1% increments)

66

SD1252 Terminal AM output When Pr.158 = "70", analog output can be performed from terminal AM. (0.1% increments)

SD1253 AM0 output When Pr.306 or Pr.310 = "70", analog output can be performed from terminals AM0 and AM1 of the FR-A8AY. (0.1% increments)

SD1254 AM1 output

Device number

Name Description Page Supported model A800 A800

Plus F800 E800

S pe

ci al

re gi

st er

fo r c

on tro

l

411. PLC FUNCTION 1.9 Device map

4

*1 Always "MAIN". After "MAIN", four space (20H) characters are stored. *2 Always set to the STF signal in the Network operation mode. Changing the function with Pr.178 is disabled. *3 Always set to the STR signal in the Network operation mode. Changing the function with Pr.179 is disabled. *4 The Pr.811 setting is available only for the FR-A800 series and FR-A800 Plus series. *5 Monitoring is available only for the FR-A800-R2R series. *6 Settings differ according to the inverter capacity. *7 Setting is available for the FR-A800 series, FR-A800 Plus series, and FR-F800 series. *8 Pr.430 is used to switch between the value before the electronic gear operation (Pr.430 = less than "1000" or "9999") and the value after the

electronic gear operation (Pr.430 = "1000" or more or "8888"). *9 Monitoring is available when the data type is unsigned bit string (16-bit) word. *10 Monitoring negative values is available when the data type is signed doubleword. *11 The value can be set in frequency (0.01 Hz increments), in rotations per minute (1 r/min increments), and in machine speed (1 increments)

according to the Pr.53 setting value.

SD1255 PID operation control Sets the start/stop of PID operation. Set "1 (first PID action)", "2 (Second PID action)", or "3 (first and second PID action)" to start PID control.

68

SD1300 Terminal 6 input Stores the analog input value (0.1% increments) to terminal 6 of the FR-A8AZ.

66

SD1301 Terminal DA1 output When Pr.838 = "70", analog output can be performed from terminal DA1 of the FR-A8AZ. (0.1% increments)

66

SD1308 Second PID control set point/deviation

Set the second PID set point or the second PID deviation. (0.01% increments)

68

SD1309 Second PID control measured value

Set the second PID measured value. (0.01% increments)

SD1310 Second PID control manipulated amount

Stores the second PID manipulated amount. (0.01% increments)

SD1320 2-word parameter content (lower) (RAM)

Use 2-word inverter parameters to read or write using sequence programs. SD1320: Lower 1 word SD1321: Upper 1 word

61, 62

SD1321 2-word parameter content (upper) (RAM)

SD1322 2-word parameter content (lower) (EEPROM)

Use 2-word inverter parameters to read or write using sequence programs. SD1322: Lower 1 word SD1323: Upper 1 word

SD1323 2-word parameter content (upper) (EEPROM)

SD1460 Station number in inverter-to-inverter link

The station number in the inverter-to-inverter link is stored.

SD1461 Communication status of inverter-to-inverter link

The communication status of the slaves in the inverter-to- inverter link is stored. (In the slave inverter, only its own communication status is indicated.)

Device number

Name Description Page Supported model A800 A800

Plus F800 E800

S pe

ci al

re gi

st er

fo r c

on tro

l

Reserved (H00) b15 b8 b7 b0

Station No.

Value Station No. H00 H01 H02 H03

Master Slave 1 Slave 2 Slave 3

H04 H05 HFF

Slave 4 Slave 5 Function disabled

b15 b0b4b5

Bit Target station Description 0 1 2 3

Slave 1 Slave 2 1: The link is established. Slave 3

4 Slave 4 Slave 5

0: The link is not established.

2 1. PLC FUNCTION 1.9 Device map

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1.9.8 Special register (master)

1.9.9 Special register (slave)

Device No. Name Description SD1470 to SD1477 Inverter-to-inverter link receive data 1 to 8 (slave 1) Data 1 to 8 received from slave 1 SD1478 to SD1485 Inverter-to-inverter link send data 1 to 8 (slave 1) Data 1 to 8 sent to slave 1 SD1486 to SD1493 Inverter-to-inverter link receive data 1 to 8 (slave 2) Data 1 to 8 received from slave 2 SD1494 to SD1501 Inverter-to-inverter link send data 1 to 8 (slave 2) Data 1 to 8 sent to slave 2 SD1502 to SD1509 Inverter-to-inverter link receive data 1 to 8 (slave 3) Data 1 to 8 received from slave 3 SD1510 to SD1517 Inverter-to-inverter link send data 1 to 8 (slave 3) Data 1 to 8 sent to slave 3 SD1518 to SD1525 Inverter-to-inverter link receive data 1 to 8 (slave 4) Data 1 to 8 received from slave 4 SD1526 to SD1533 Inverter-to-inverter link send data 1 to 8 (slave 4) Data 1 to 8 sent to slave 4 SD1534 to SD1541 Inverter-to-inverter link receive data 1 to 8 (slave 5) Data 1 to 8 received from slave 5 SD1542 to SD1549 Inverter-to-inverter link send data 1 to 8 (slave 5) Data 1 to 8 sent to slave 5

Device No. Name Description SD1470 to SD1477 Inverter-to-inverter link receive data 1 to 8 (master) Receive data 1 to 8 from master SD1478 to SD1485 Inverter-to-inverter link send data 1 to 8 (master) Send data 1 to 8 to master SD1486 to SD1549 For manufacturer setting. Do not set.

431. PLC FUNCTION 1.9 Device map

4

1.10 Special registers to monitor and control inverter status

Read from and write to user sequences are possible by assigning the data to monitor and change the operating status of the inverter from SD1133 to SD1147. (For the list of registers, refer to page 31.)

1.10.1 Always readable data The following data is always readable. They are refreshed on every END instruction automatically.

Operation monitor These are the data devices by which the output frequency, output current, and output voltage of the inverter can be monitored, and which are always readable (write is disabled). Pay attention to the setting increments.

NOTE Setting frequency can be set in increments of 0.01 Hz, but operates at 0.1 Hz increments in actual operation.

Fault history (error code and error definition) When the inverter fails, it stores error codes. A maximum of eight faults are stored with error codes in the order shown below, and they are always readable (write is disabled).

For the details of the error codes (data codes) and their definition, refer to the Instruction Manual of the inverter.

The following description is of a program that reads out the latest fault record of the inverter and stores to D0.

*1 Assign an input device to X0F according to the system requirement.

Device number

Name Setting increments

Data example Data access condition

SD1133 Output frequency monitor

0.01Hz Device content 600060.00 Hz Always accessible

SD1134 Output current monitor 0.01A Device content 2002.00 A SD1135 Output voltage monitor 0.01V Device content 100010.0 V

Older

Newer

SD1136 SD1137 SD1138 SD1139

b15 to b8 b7 to b0 Fault record 2

Fault record 4 Fault record 6 Fault record 8 Fault record 7

Fault record 5 Fault record 3

Fault record 1

Faults history read request Stores only the lower 8 bits of fault history 1, 2 (SD1136) into D0.

(The latest fault information is stored into D0.)

SD1136*1

4 1. PLC FUNCTION 1.10 Special registers to monitor and control inverter status

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Fault clear signal (X51 signal) When an inverter fault occurs, X51 signal clears the fault without resetting the inverter. By using the X51 signal, the inverter fault can be cleared with the PLC function still operating. Set "51" in Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) in advance to enable the X51 signal.

The fault clear function using the X51 signal does not function while the retry function is operating (including during the retry waiting time). (The X51 signal operates when the retry count is exceeded (E.RET).

When the fault is cleared, start commands from PU and communication are also cleared. (All commands except the start command from communication are maintained in the status before the fault is cleared.)

NOTE E.CPU, E.P24, E.CTE, E.1 to E.3, E.5 to E.7, E.13, E.16 to E.20, E.SAF, E.PE2, and E.PE6 are not cleared by the X51

signal. When several faults have occurred and at least one of them cannot be cleared, it is not cleared by the X51 signal. When a fault is cleared, the accumulated heat values of the electronic thermal O/L relay and regenerative brake are not

cleared. Faults including E.THM, E.THT, and E.BE may occur again. The inverter remains in the stop status immediately after a fault is cleared. However, the inverter starts operating again

after the fault is cleared if the start command is ON. When an error occurs, the normal reset function operates when the STOP/RESET key on the operation panel or parameter

unit is pushed. Be careful not to push the key by mistake. During position control, note that clearing a fault may cause a stop position fault as position control operation will be

restarted by the command input at the place where the fault is cleared. Changing terminal assignment by using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other

functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

X51 signal OFF ON ONOFF OFF ON

Fault occurs

If a fault occurs while the X51 signal has been ON, turn OFF the X51 signal once, then turn it ON again.

Fault is cleared by turn ON of X51 signal.

If a fault occurs while the X51 signal has been ON, the fault is not cleared.

Fault status (terminal ABC)

Fault is cleared by turn ON of X51 signal.

451. PLC FUNCTION 1.10 Special registers to monitor and control inverter status

4

Self-diagnostic error, error number and details When an operation error occurs during execution of sequence programs, the following error numbers are stored in SD0. When a self-diagnostic error occurs, the "P.RUN" indicator (LED) blinks.

*1 Supported by the FR-E800 series only.

NOTE Operation at error stop

Output (Y) is cleared. Other devices remain in the status before the error stop occurred. To clear the statuses, turn OFF or reset (turn RES signal ON (0.1 s) and then OFF) the inverter.

1.10.2 Data read by controlling read command (from OFF to ON) The operation mode and set frequency of the inverter can be read.

For the data devices above, data is stored when the read command switches from OFF to ON and read completion switches from OFF to ON. Data is not refreshed while the read command is ON. (Data is not updated.) Data is refreshed by turning the read command OFF and ON again.

Timing diagram of a data read

Error No. Error name Details 1010 END NOT EXECUTE END command was not executed. 2200 MISSING PARA. No parameter file. 2503 CAN'T EXE.PRG No program file exists. 3000 PARAMETER ERR The content of the parameter indicated by the individual error information (SD16) is incorrect. 3003 PARAMETER ERR The number of device points set in the PLC parameter device setting is not within the usable

range. 4000 INSTRCT.CODE ERR An undecodable instruction code is included in the program.

An unusable instruction is included in the program. 4010 MISSING END INS. No END (FEND) instruction in the program.

4021*1 CANT SET(P) The same pointer number is assigned to multiple common/local pointers used in each file.

4100 OPERATION ERROR Data that cannot be used in instructions is included.

4101*1 OPERATION ERROR The number of data used in the instruction is set to exceed the available range. The data or constants stored in the device specified by the instruction exceed the available range. For writing to the host CPU shared memory, the write inhibited area is specified as the write destination address. The ranges of the stored data of the devices specified by the instruction are overlapping. The device specified by the instruction exceeds the range for the number of device points. The interrupt pointer number specified by the instruction exceeds the available range.

4210*1 CANT EXECUTE(P) The specified pointer number does not exist before the END instruction. The pointer number that is not used as a label in the same program is specified. The END instruction does not exist.

5001 WDT ERROR The program scan time exceeded the watchdog timer value set in the PLC RAS setting of the PLC parameter.

5010 PRG.TIME OVER The program scan time exceeded the constant scan time set in the PLC RAS setting of the PLC parameter.

Device number

Name Read instruction

Read completion

Data access condition

SD1140 Operation mode setting read Y20 X20 Always accessible SD1141 Set frequency read (RAM) Y21 X21 SD1142 Set frequency read (EEPROM) Y22 X22

6 1. PLC FUNCTION 1.10 Special registers to monitor and control inverter status

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

User sequence processing

1) Read command is turned ON in user sequence.

3) In user sequence, ON of read completion is confirmed and data is read from special register and processed.

4) After completion of read, read command is turned OFF.

2) Inverter CPU stores inverter data into special register and turns ON read completion.

5) Inverter CPU confirms that read command is OFF and turns OFF read completion.

Y2n(n=0 to 2) Read command

X2n(n=0 to 2) Read completion

SD114n(n=0 to 2) Read data

471. PLC FUNCTION 1.10 Special registers to monitor and control inverter status

4

Operation mode setting read (SD1140)

NOTE When Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "0", the setting is applied. However, if Pr.79 = "3 or 4", "H0002" (PU operation

mode) is applied.

The following description is of a program that reads out the operation mode data to D0.

*1 Assign an input device to X0F according to the system requirement.

Set frequency read (RAM) (SD1141) The frequency set in RAM can be read out from SD1141. Its increment is 0.01 Hz. (For example, "6000" means 60.00 Hz.) If the rotation rate is set, the increment is 1 r/min or 0.1 r/min according to the setting value of Pr.811. (FR-A800 series and FR- A800 Plus series only)

The following description is of a program that reads out the set frequency (RAM) to D0.

*1 Assign an input device to X0F according to the system requirement.

NOTE The frequency to be read is not the command value of an external signal.

Data content Operation mode H0000 NET operation mode H0001 External operation mode H0002 PU operation mode

Operation mode read setting request Turns ON operation mode read request pulse. Stores operation mode data to D0 when operation mode setting read completion signal turns ON. Turns ON operation mode setting read command. (Until operation mode setting read completion signal turns ON)

SD1140

*1

Set frequency read (RAM) setting request Turns ON set frequency read (RAM) request pulse. Stores data to D0 when set frequency read (RAM) completion signal turns ON. Turns ON set frequency read (RAM) command. (Until set frequency read (RAM) completion signal turns ON)

SD1141

*1

8 1. PLC FUNCTION 1.10 Special registers to monitor and control inverter status

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Set frequency read (EEPROM) (SD1142) The frequency set in EEPROM can be read from SD1142. Its increment is 0.01 Hz. (For example, "6000" means 60.00 Hz.) If the rotation rate is set, the increment is 1 r/min or 0.1 r/min according to the setting value of Pr.811. (FR-A800 series and FR- A800 Plus series only)

The following description is of a program that reads out the set frequency (EEPROM) to D0.

*1 Assign an input device to X0F according to the system requirement.

NOTE The frequency to be read is not the command value of an external signal.

The following program reads the set frequency (EEPROM) to D0. Set frequency read (EEPROM) setting request Stores data to D0 when set frequency read (EEPROM) completion signal turns ON. Turns ON set frequency read (EEPROM) command. (Until set frequency read (EEPROM) completion signal turns ON)

SD1142

*1

491. PLC FUNCTION 1.10 Special registers to monitor and control inverter status

5

1.10.3 Data writing method by controlling write command (from OFF to ON)

Writing of an operation mode and setting frequency to the inverter, a batch clear of fault records, and all parameter clear can be executed.

The data above is written at the point when write completion turns ON after the write command turns from OFF to ON. (Written at clear completion of SD1146 executed for fault record batch clear and SD1147 for all parameter clear.) To write again, the write command must be turned OFF and then ON again.

Timing diagram of a data write

Device number Name Write instruction

Write completion

Data access condition

SD1143 Writing the operation mode setting

Y23 X23 Pr.79 = 0, 2

SD1144 Writing the setting frequency (RAM)

Y24 X24 PU operation mode or NET operation mode

SD1145 Writing the setting frequency (EEPROM)

Y25 X25

SD1146 Batch clearing of fault records Y26 X26 Always accessible SD1147 All parameter clear Y27 X27 According to the setting of Pr.77

X2n(n=3 to 7) Write completion

SD114n(n=3 to 7) Write data

User data

Y2n(n=3 to 7) Write command

1) In user sequence, user data is stored into write data area (SD114n).

2) In user sequence, write command is turned ON.

4) After confirmation of write completion, write command is turned OFF.

3) Turns ON when inverter CPU completes data write to inverter. Fault history clear and parameter clear turn ON at completion of clear. "0" written to SD1150 indicates normal completion. Any value other than 0 indicates abnormal completion.

5) Inverter CPU confirms that write command is OFF and turns OFF write completion.

0 1. PLC FUNCTION 1.10 Special registers to monitor and control inverter status

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Writing operation mode settings (SD1143) Data content:

The method for changing operation modes is shown in the following chart when Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "0".

When Pr.79 = "2", the chart is as follows.

NOTE When Pr.79 "0", the mode is fixed.

There are no limiting conditions by the command source for operation mode transitions. However, the operation mode may not be able to be changed depending on the settings of parameters (Pr.79, Pr.340, etc.). When the operation mode settings are completed normally, write completion signal (X23) turns ON at the same time as SD1150 is set to "0". Writing any setting value other than H0000 to H0002 or executing writing while the inverter is operating causes the write completion signal (X23) to turn ON at the same time as setting HFFFF in SD1150, resulting in error completion. If an error completion occurs, the operation mode is not changed.

The following description is of the program that changes the operation mode to NET operation mode.

*1 Assign an input device to X0F according to the system requirement.

Data content Operation mode H0000 NET operation mode H0001 External operation mode H0002 PU operation mode

H0001

H0000

H0002

H0001

H0002

H0000

NET operation mode (CC-Link)

External operation mode

PU operation mode

H0001

H0000

External operation mode

NET operation mode

Operation mode write setting request

Normal write

Abnormal write

Turns ON operation mode setting write request pulse. Check whether operation mode setting write completion signal turned ON to judge whether write was performed normally or not. Stores 0 (NET operation mode) to SD1143 and turns ON operation mode setting write command. (Until completion signal turns ON)

SD1150

SD1150

SD1143

*1

511. PLC FUNCTION 1.10 Special registers to monitor and control inverter status

5

Setting frequency write (RAM) (SD1144) The content of SD1144 is written to the RAM as setting frequency. Its increment is 0.01 Hz. (For example, 60.00 Hz is written as "6000".) If the rotation rate is set, the increment is 1 r/min or 0.1 r/min according to the setting value of Pr.811. (FR-A800 series and FR- A800 Plus series only) The frequency can be set within the range of 0 to 59000 (0 to 590.00 Hz). When frequency settings are written normally, the write completion signal (X24) turns ON at the same time as SD1150 is set to "0". Executing writing with any value that is outside the specified range causes the write completion signal (X24) to turn ON at the same time as setting HFFFF in SD1150, resulting in error completion. If an error completion occurs, the setting frequency is not changed.

This can be set in PU operation mode and NET operation mode. Refer to the Instruction Manual of the inverter.

The following description is of a program that changes the setting frequency (RAM) to 30 Hz.

*1 Assign an input device to X0F according to the system requirement.

Set frequency write (RAM) setting request

Normal write

Abnormal write

Turns ON set frequency write (RAM) command pulse. Check whether set frequency write (RAM) completion signal is turned ON to judge whether write was performed normally or not. Stores 3000 (30Hz) into SD1144, and turns ON set frequency write (RAM) command. (Until completion signal turns ON)

SD1144

SD1150

SD1150

*1

2 1. PLC FUNCTION 1.10 Special registers to monitor and control inverter status

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Setting frequency write (EEPROM) (SD1145) The content of SD1145 is written to EEPROM as setting frequency. Its increment is 0.01 Hz. (For example, 60.00 Hz is written as "6000".) If the rotation rate is set, the increment is 1 r/min or 0.1 r/min according to the setting value of Pr.811. (FR-A800 series and FR- A800 Plus series only) The frequency can be set within the range of 0 to 59000 (0 to 590.00 Hz). When frequency settings are written normally, the write completion signal (X25) turns ON at the same time as SD1150 is set to "0". Executing writing with any value that is outside the specified range causes the write completion signal (X25) to turn ON at the same time as setting HFFFF in SD1150, resulting in error completion. If an error completion occurs, the setting frequency is not changed.

This can be set in PU operation mode and NET operation mode. Refer to the Instruction Manual of the inverter.

The following description is of a program that changes the setting frequency (EEPROM) to 10 Hz.

*1 Assign an input device to X0F according to the system requirement.

NOTE When set frequencies need to be changed often, use the device SD1144 "set frequency (RAM)". There is a limitation on

the number of times EEPROM can be written to. (Approximately 100,000 times)

1000

Set frequency write (EEPROM) setting request

Normal write

Abnormal write

Turns ON set frequency write (EEPROM) request pulse. Check whether set frequency write (EEPROM) completion signal is turned ON to judge whether write was performed normally or not. Stores 1000 (10Hz) into SD1145, and turns ON set frequency write (EEPROM) command. (Until completion signal turns ON)

SD1150

SD1150

SD1145

*1

531. PLC FUNCTION 1.10 Special registers to monitor and control inverter status

5

Batch clear of fault records (SD1146) When H9696 is written to SD1146, fault records are cleared in a batch. When clearing is completed, the write completion signal (X26) turns ON at the same time as SD1150 is set to "0". Executing writing with any value that is outside the specified range or writing while the inverter is running causes the write completion signal (X26) to turn ON at the same time as setting HFFFF in SD1150, resulting in error completion. In the case of error completion, the fault records are not cleared.

The following description is of the program that batch clears fault records.

*1 Assign an input device to X0F according to the system requirement.

Parameter clear (SD1147) When H9696 or H9966 is written to SD1147, all parameters are cleared. When H5A5A or H55AA is written to SD1147, parameters except the communication parameters are cleared. (Refer to the Instruction Manual of the inverter.)

When clearing is complete, the write completion signal (X27) turns ON at the same time as SD1150 is set to "0". Executing writing with any value that is outside the specified range or writing while the inverter is running causes the write completion signal (X27) to turn ON at the same time as setting HFFFF in SD1150, resulting in error completion. In the case of an error completion, the parameters are not cleared.

NOTE For the parameters that are cleared by Parameter clear or All parameter clear, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) of

the inverter and the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).

This can be set in the PU operation mode and NET operation mode. Refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) of the inverter and the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).

Device No. Setting value

Communication parameters

Other parameters

Details

SD1147 H9696 Parameter clear. H9966 All parameter clear. H5A5A Parameter clear except for communication parameters. H55AA All parameter clear except for communication parameters.

Faults history batch clear request

Normal write

Abnormal write

Turns ON faults history batch clear request pulse. Check whether faults history batch clear signal is turned ON to judge whether write was performed normally or not. Stores H9696 (batch clear code) to SD1146 and turns ON faults history batch clear command. (Until completion signal turns ON)

SD1150

SD1150

SD1146

*1

4 1. PLC FUNCTION 1.10 Special registers to monitor and control inverter status

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

The following description is of the program that clears all parameters.

*1 Assign an input device to X0F according to the system requirement.

NOTE While communicating with FR Configurator2, clear the parameters using H5A5A or H55AA.

Device SD1150: inverter parameter access error (refer to page 57)

1.10.4 Inverter operating status control

Inverter operating status control (SD1148) SD1148 is a device for controlling the operating status of the inverter. The inverter operation can be controlled by turning the bits b0 to b11 of SD1148 ON/OFF (1,0). All initial values are "0".

When SD1148 is set to "5", the bits b0 and b2 are turned to 1 (ON) and thus STF and RH are turned ON, creating the fast forward rotation command.

*1 Always set to the STF signal in the Network operation mode. Changing the function with Pr.178 is disabled. *2 Always set to the STR signal in the Network operation mode. Changing the function with Pr.179 is disabled.

NOTE The functions of SD1148 bits are assigned by Pr.178 to Pr.189 in the same way as for the external input terminal. Note

that SQ signal (setting value: 50) cannot be assigned. Turn ON SM1255 (special register selection) before using SD1148. (Refer to page 28.)

Device number Name Data access condition SD1148 Inverter operating status control Always accessible.

However, this is only active in External/NET operation mode. (Disabled in PU operation mode)

SD1149 Inverter operating status control enable/ disable

For FR-A800/FR-A800 Plus/FR-F800 series For FR-E800 series

Normal write

Abnormal write Stores H9696 (all parameter clear code) to SD1147 and turns ON faults history batch clear command. (Until completion signal turns ON)

All parameter clear request Turns ON all parameter clear request pulse. Check whether all parameter clear signal is turned ON to judge whether write was performed normally or not.

SD1150

SD1150

SD1147

*1

Related device

b15 b12 b11 b8 b7 b4 b3 b0 0:OFF 1:ON

STF (Pr.178) STR (Pr.179) RH (Pr.182) RM (Pr.181) RL (Pr.180) JOG (Pr.185) RT (Pr.183) AU (Pr.184) CS (Pr.186) MRS (Pr.187) STP(STOP) (Pr.188) RES (Pr.189)

Invalid

101000000000

*1 *2

b15 b12 b11 b8 b7 b4 b3 b0 0:OFF 1:ON

STF/DI0 STR/DI1 RH RM RL

Invalid

10100000000 0

NET X1 MRS NET X2 RES NET X3 NET X4 NET X5

*1 *2

Invalid

551. PLC FUNCTION 1.10 Special registers to monitor and control inverter status

5

Inverter operating status control enable/disable setting (SD1149) The inverter operating status control by SD1148 and SM1200 to SM1211 can be enabled/disabled. Control of the bits of SD1148 and SM1200 to SM1211 are enabled by turning the corresponding bits b0 to b11 of SD1149 ON/OFF (1, 0). All initial values are "0".

When SD1149 is set to HFFF, the bits b0 to b11 change to 1 (ON) disabling all inputs through external terminals, thus enabling operation control by the inverter operation control (SD1148) and inverter operating status control flag (SM1200 to SM1211).

*1 Always set to the STF signal in the Network operation mode. Changing the function with Pr.178 is disabled. *2 Always set to the STF signal in the Network operation mode. Changing the function with Pr.179 is disabled.

NOTE When SD1148 and SM1200 to SM1211 are enabled by SD1149, control by external terminal input or CC-Link remote input

are disabled for the bits that are enabled. (Same as setting Pr.178 to Pr.189 to "no function".) When terminals are enabled by PLC function, the control through external terminals is disabled. Input through external terminals is always enabled for SQ signal. (Control of SQ signal cannot be performed from each

SD1149 bit.)

Program example of operating the inverter in fast forward rotation.

*1 Assign an input device to X0F according to the system requirement.

*2 Turn ON SM1255 (special register selection) before using SD1148. (Refer to page 28.)

For FR-A800/FR-A800 Plus/FR-F800 series For FR-E800 series

b15 b12 b11 b8 b7 b4b3 b0 0:OFF 1:ON

STF (Pr.178) STR (Pr.179) RH (Pr.182) RM (Pr.181) RL (Pr.180) JOG (Pr.185) RT (Pr.183) AU (Pr.184) CS (Pr.186) MRS (Pr.187) STP(STOP) (Pr.188) RES (Pr.189)

Invalid

111111111111

*1 *2

b15 b12 b11 b8 b7 b4 b3 b0 0:OFF 1:ON

STF/DI0 STR/DI1 RH RM RL

Invalid

11111111111 1

NET X1 MRS NET X2 RES NET X3 NET X4 NET X5

*1 *2

Invalid

Operation start

Operation stop

Turns ON operation start pulse.

Enables all inverter operation status control enable/disable bits, and disables external terminal inputs.

Self-holds operation start, and turns ON bits 0 (STF) and 2 (RH) of inverter operation status control, SD1148.

At input of stop signal, clears inverter operation status control, SD1148, to 0 and decelerates inverter to stop.

HFFF SD1149

SD1148

SD1148

SM400

*1

*2

*2

6 1. PLC FUNCTION 1.10 Special registers to monitor and control inverter status

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1.10.5 Inverter parameter access error (SD1150)

When an out-of-range setting value is written to a parameter or an out-of-range frequency is set using sequence programs, or when writing is attempted while writing is disabled, a write error occurs and an error code is stored in SD1150.

Parameter number + H8000 is stored to SD1150.

If an error occurs when Pr.0 Torque boost is written, H8000 (H0 + H8000) is stored to SD1150. If an error occurs when Pr.10 DC injection brake operation frequency is written, H800A is stored to SD1150.

HFFFF is stored to SD1150. (The initial values is "0".)

The error code stored after the error occurrence will be cleared by writing "0" in SD1150. (The error code is retained until "0" is written in SD1150.)

1.10.6 Inverter status (SD1151)

Operating status of the inverter is stored. Each bit is set according to the status of the inverter.

1.10.7 User-defined error (SD1214) By setting the values "16 to 20" in SD1214, alarms for the inverter can be created. When an alarm occurs, the inverter stops. Values other than "16 to 20" are invalid. Furthermore, this function is disabled when Pr.414 = "0". The created alarms are recognized as E.16 to E.20 by the inverter.

Device number Name Data access condition SD1150 Inverter parameter access error Always accessible

Device number Name Data access condition SD1151 Inverter status Always accessible

b15 b8 b7 b4 b3 b0 0: OFF 1: ON

Inverter running (RUN) Forward running Reverse running Up to frequency (SU) Overload alarm (OL) Instantaneous power failure /undervoltage (IPF) (Only FR-A800 series, FR-A800 Plus series, and FR-F800 series) Output frequency detection (FU) Fault output (ALM) Alarm output (LF)

Terminal SO status

571. PLC FUNCTION 1.10 Special registers to monitor and control inverter status

5

1.10.8 Monitor setting selection (SD1215 to SD1218) The content of SD1216 to SD1218 can be displayed on the operation panel or the parameter unit. Use SD1215 to set the decimal point display for displaying the content of SD1216 to SD1218 on the operation panel or the parameter unit. To display the content of SD1216 to SD1218 on the operation panel or the parameter unit, set "40 to 42" in Pr.774 to Pr.776.

To display the monitors set in SD1216 to SD1218 to decimal places, set SD1215 as follows.

*1 Ignore bits other than those above.

Setting example: 1.To display SD1216 without decimals

Set H0000 in SD1215. Set "40" in Pr.774.

2.To display SD1216 in 0.1 increment, and SD1218 in 0.001 increment. Set H3100 in SD1215. Set "40" in Pr.774 and "42" in Pr.776.

NOTE For monitoring SD1216 to SD1218 on the LCD operation panel or the parameter unit, the monitor names and units can be

set in SD1216 to SD1218 by using G.PRR, GP.PRR, or UMSG instruction (refer to page 218). For details on Pr.774 to Pr.776, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) of the inverter and the FR-E800 Instruction

Manual (Function).

Device Monitor description Pr.774 to Pr.776 setting SD1216 User monitor 1 40 SD1217 User monitor 2 41 SD1218 User monitor 3 42

bn+1 bn Increment 0 0 1 increment (no decimals) 0 1 0.1 increment 1 0 0.01 increment 1 1 0.001 increment

b15 b12 b11 b8 b7 b4 b3 b0

Select the displayed decimal point for the SD1216 monitor.

Select the displayed decimal point for the SD1217 monitor.

Select the displayed decimal point for the SD1218 monitor.

8 1. PLC FUNCTION 1.10 Special registers to monitor and control inverter status

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1.10.9 Inverter-to-inverter link function The inverter-to-inverter link function enables communication between multiple inverters connected by Ethernet in a small-scale system by using the I/O devices and special registers of the PLC function. (Only FR-A800-E, FR-F800-E, and FR-E800-E) For the parameters of the inverter-to-inverter link function, refer to the Ethernet Function Manual or FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Communication).

I/O device The relationship between the I/O device of the master station and the I/O device of the slave station is as follows.

Special register The relationship between the special register of the master station and the special register of the slave station is as follows.

Master-to-slave signal timing diagram

X40 to X4F X40 to X4F X50 to X5F

Y40 to Y4F Y50 to Y5F

Inverter (master)

Inverter (slave 1)

Inverter (slave 2)

Y40 to Y4F

X40 to X4F

Y40 to Y4F

SD1470 to SD1477 SD1478 to SD1485 SD1486 to SD1493 SD1494 to SD1501

Inverter (master)

Inverter (slave 1)

Inverter (slave 2)

SD1478 to SD1485 SD1470 to SD1477

SD1478 to SD1485 SD1470 to SD1477

Slave 1 X40

Master Y40

Y40 of the master is turned ON in user sequence program.

Y40 of the master is turned OFF in user sequence program.

X40 of the slave 1 is turned ON by link function.

X40 of the slave 1 is turned OFF by link function.

591. PLC FUNCTION 1.10 Special registers to monitor and control inverter status

6

The following shows a program example to establish a link between the external terminal of the master and the inverter operating status control flag of the slave 1. "242 (positive logic)" is set in Pr.313 to use the Inverter-to-inverter linkup (LINK) signal.

The following shows the relationship between the devices of the master and the devices of the slave 1 in the program example.

NOTE In the program example above, the inverter-to-inverter link output and the inverter operating status control flag are cleared

when a fault occurs in the inverter or communication between the master and the slave 1 cannot be established. Set the operation at occurrence of a communication error as required. (For details, refer to the Ethernet Function Manual or FR- E800 Instruction Manual (Communication).)

Since H00FF is set in SD1149 of the slave, the control input through the external terminals (STF, STR, RH, RM, RL, JOG, RT, and AU) is disabled.

Data communication is disabled if an inverter using multicast transmissions is set as the master among inverters using multicast transmissions and inverters using broadcast transmissions in a system. To enable communications between them, the inverter using broadcast transmissions must be set as the master.

Transfers X00 to X0F to Y40 to Y4FK2X0MOV K2Y40

Master

K0MOVP K2Y40

SMI1225

SMI1223

0

29 Clears Y40 to Y4F

External terminal STF Master output

SMI1223 SMI1225

Fault output DO0 (Y242 Pr.313 = 242)

Fault output

DO0 (Y242 Pr.313 = 242)

Master output

Enables inverter operating status controlH0FFMOVP SD1149

Slave 1

K2X40MOV K2SM1200

K0MOVP K2SM1200

SMI1225

SMI1223

0

49

Transfers X40 to X47 to SM1200 to SM1207

Clears SM1200 to SM1207

SMI1223 SMI1225

Fault output DO0 (Y242 Pr.313 = 242)

Fault output

DO0 (Y242 Pr.313 = 242)

Master

External terminal

X00(STF)

X02(RH) X01(STR)

to X07(AU)

Y40

Y42 Y41

Y47

Inverter-to-inverter link output

Inverter-to-inverter link input

Slave 1

X40

X42 X41

X47

SM1200(STF)

SM1202(RH) SM1201(STR)

SM1207(AU)

Inverter operating status control flag

to to to

0 1. PLC FUNCTION 1.10 Special registers to monitor and control inverter status

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1.11 Read/Write method of inverter parameters

1.11.1 Reading inverter parameters

To read a parameter, store the parameter number in SD1241 (SD1243) and turn ON Y28 (Y2A). The parameter content will be stored in SD1242 (SD1244). After the reading is complete, X28 (X2A) turns ON to notify of the completion. For the 2-word parameter content, the inverter stores the content in SD1320 and SD1321 (SD1322 and SD1323), and SM1256 turns ON. (Use the device numbers in parentheses to read a parameter setting value from EEPROM.) When reading a calibration parameter (Pr.902 to Pr.935), set a value listed below in SD1234 (SD1235) to read each calibration value. 0: Setting value (frequency) 1: Analog value by parameter setting 2: Analog value input from terminal If an access error such as non-existent parameter occurs, the value of the specified parameter number plus 8000H is stored in SD1150. (Refer to page 57.)

Inverter parameter data read timing diagram

Device number.

Name Command Completion Data access condition (Operation mode)

SD1241 Parameter number (RAM) Y28 X28 Always allowed SD1242 Parameter content (RAM) SD1234 Second parameter change (RAM) SD1320 2-word parameter content (lower) (RAM) SD1321 2-word parameter content (upper) (RAM) SD1243 Parameter number (EEPROM) Y2A X2A SD1244 Parameter content (EEPROM) SD1235 Second parameter change (EEPROM) SD1322 2-word parameter content (lower) (EEPROM) SD1323 2-word parameter content (upper) (EEPROM)

Y28 (Y2A) Parameter read command X28 (X2A) Parameter read completion

SD1242 (SD1244) Parameter read data

User sequence processing

Inverter parameter

1) Read command is turned ON in user sequence program.

3) In user sequence program, ON of read completion is confirmed and data are read from data register SD1242 (SD1244) and processed.

4) After completion of read, read command is turned OFF.

2) Inverter CPU stores inverter parameter data into data register SD1242 (SD1244), and turns ON read completion.

5) Inverter CPU confirms that read command is OFF and turns OFF read completion.

611. PLC FUNCTION 1.11 Read/Write method of inverter parameters

6

1.11.2 Writing inverter parameters

To write to a parameter, store the parameter number in SD1241 (SD1243) and the value to be written in SD1242 (SD1244), and turn ON Y29 (Y2B) to execute writing. After the writing completes, X29 (X2B) turns ON to notify of the completion. For the 2-word parameter content, store the value to be written in SD1320 and SD1321 (SD1322 and SD1323), and turn Y29 (Y2B) ON after turning SM1257 ON. (Use the device numbers in parentheses to write a parameter setting value to EEPROM.) For details on the 2-word parameters, refer to the Instruction Manual of the inverter. When writing to a calibration parameter (Pr.902 to Pr.935), set a value listed below in SD1234 (SD1235) to write each calibration value. 0: Setting value (frequency) 1: Analog value by parameter setting 2: Analog value input from terminal

When the inverter parameter write completion signal (X29 (RAM) or X2B (EEPROM)) turns ON with normal completion, SD1150 is set to 0. If an error in access to a parameter such as setting an out-of-range value and writing during inverter operation occurs, the write completion signal (X29 (RAM) or X2B (EEPROM)) turns ON and the value of the parameter number plus H8000 is set in SD1150 as soon as the write completion signal (X29 (RAM) or X2B (EEPROM)) is turned ON, resulting in error completion. When an error completion occurs, the parameter is not written. (For example, if an error occurs in Pr.0 Torque boost, H8000 is written to SD1150.) For details on whether inverter parameter writing is allowed, refer to Pr.77 Parameter write selection.

Inverter parameter writing must be performed in PU operation mode or NET operation mode. (Refer to the Instruction Manual of the inverter.)

Write 65520 (HFFF0) for the parameter value "8888", and 65535 (HFFFF) for "9999."

Inverter parameter data write timing diagram

Device number Name Command Completion Data access condition (Operation mode)

SD1241 Parameter number (RAM) Y29 X29 PU or NET operation mode (depending on Pr.77)SD1242 Parameter content (RAM)

SD1234 Second parameter change (RAM) SD1320 2-word parameter content (lower) (RAM) SD1321 2-word parameter content (upper) (RAM) SD1243 Parameter number (EEPROM) Y2B X2B SD1244 Parameter content (EEPROM) SD1235 Second parameter change (EEPROM) SD1322 2-word parameter content (lower) (EEPROM) SD1323 2-word parameter content (upper) (EEPROM)

2 1. PLC FUNCTION 1.11 Read/Write method of inverter parameters

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Y29(Y2B) Parameter write command X29(X2B) Parameter write completion

Inverter parameter

SD1242(SD1244) Parameter write data

User sequence data

1) In user sequence program, user data are stored into parameter write data area (SD1242(SD1244)).

2) Write command is turned ON in user sequence.

4) After confirmation of write completion, write command is turned OFF.

3) Turns ON when inverter CPU completes inverter parameter data write. "0" written to SD1150 indicates normal completion. Any value other than "0" indicates abnormal completion.

5) Inverter CPU confirms that write command is OFF and turns OFF write completion.

631. PLC FUNCTION 1.11 Read/Write method of inverter parameters

6

1.12 User area reading/writing Inverter parameters Pr.1150 to Pr.1199 can be used as user parameters. Since this parameter area and the devices D206 to D255 used in PLC function are accessible to each other, values set in Pr.1150 to Pr.1199 are available in sequence programs. In addition, operation results in sequence programs can be monitored with Pr.1150 to Pr.1199.

Turn the read/write instruction from OFF to ON and then turn the read/write completion ON to read/write the user parameters from RAM and EEPROM.

Application example of user parameter Operation timings can be adjusted by assigning a timer in D206 and varying the value set in the timer. Values can be set to the timer with the Pr.1150 setting without changing the program.

Device number Parameter number Name Command Completion Data access D206 to D255 Pr.1150 to Pr.1199 User parameter read (RAM) Y2C X2C Always allowed

User parameter write (RAM) Y2D X2D User parameter read (EEPROM/RAM) Y2E X2E User parameter write (EEPROM/RAM) Y2F X2F

Y2n

X2n User parameter read/write completion

User parameter read/write command

Read/write command is turned ON in user sequence program

After confirmation of completion, read/write command is turned OFF.

Turns ON when inverter CPU completes user parameter data read/write.

Inverter CPU confirms that read/write command is OFF and turns OFF write completion.

4 1. PLC FUNCTION 1.12 User area reading/writing

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

The user parameters (Pr.1150 to Pr.1199) and the devices (D206 to D255) can be freely read and written. Data transfer between Pr.1150 to Pr.1199 and D206 to D255 is automatically executed.

1) Writing of user parameter and devices When values are written to Pr.1150 to Pr.1199 via the operation panel, a parameter unit, or communication, they are written to the RAM area and the EEPROM area for parameter storage and also to D206 to D255 at the same time.

2) Reading user parameters and devices When values are written to D206 to D255 using the PLC function, they are written to the RAM area for storing parameters (Pr.1150 to Pr.1199) and read via the operation panel, a parameter unit, or communication. (Since they are not written to EEPROM, resetting the power restores the previous values.)

3) Process at inverter reset or power restoration When the inverter is reset, the values of Pr.1150 to Pr.1199 stored in EEPROM are transferred to the RAM area and to D206 to D255.

NOTE If EEPROM is read after writing a parameter directly (to RAM), the values in RAM are replaced by the values in EEPROM. When Pr.342 Communication EEPROM write selection = "1", RAM values are read or written.

D206 to D255 1) RAM read

2) RAM write

3) EEPROM read 1) 3) EEPROM read

Pr.1150 to Pr.1199 (RAM)

Pr.1150 to Pr.1199 (EEPROM)

Operation panel or communication (CC-Link, RS-485, etc.)

1) RAM write

2) RAM read

1) EEPROM write

651. PLC FUNCTION 1.12 User area reading/writing

6

1.13 Analog I/O function

1.13.1 Analog input Analog input values from terminals 1, 2, 4, and 6 can be read from SD1245 to SD1247, and SD1300, respectively.

The actual reading is performed at END processing of the sequence program.

NOTE The full scale value of analog input (terminals 1, 2, and 4) depends on the setting values of Pr.73 Analog input selection

and Pr.267 Terminal 4 input selection. Refer to the Instruction Manual of the inverter. The input value is an instantaneous value regardless of the parameter settings (Pr.74, Pr.822, Pr.826).

1.13.2 Analog output Write values from SD1251 to SD1254, and SD1301 to enable analog output from respective terminals. Write "70" to the output signal selection parameter of each terminal (Terminal FM/CA: Pr.54, Terminal AM: Pr.158, FR-A8AY Terminal AM0, AM1: Pr.306, Pr.310, FR-A8AZ Terminal DA1: Pr.838) to enable output from PLC function.

*1 Only for FR-E800, writing values to SD1251 or SD1252 enables analog output from the FM or AM terminal installed to the inverter. The actual reading is performed at END processing of the sequence program.

Device number Terminal name Setting increments

Data access condition

SD1245 Terminal 1 input 0.1% Always allowed (FR-A800, FR-A800 Plus, and FR- F800 series only)

SD1246 Terminal 2 input 0.1% Always allowed SD1247 Terminal 4 input 0.1% SD1300 Terminal 6 input (FR-A8AZ) 0.1% Always allowed (FR-A800 series and FR-A800 Plus

series only)

Device number Terminal name Setting increments

Data access condition

SD1251 Terminal FM/CA*1 0.1% Always allowed*1

SD1252 Terminal AM 0.1% SD1253 Terminal AM0 (FR-A8AY) 0.1% SD1254 Terminal AM1 (FR-A8AY) 0.1% SD1301 Terminal DA1 (FR-A8AZ) 0.1% Always allowed (FR-A800 series and FR-A800 Plus

series only)

6 1. PLC FUNCTION 1.13 Analog I/O function

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1.14 Pulse train input function The pulse train input function can be set in the FR-A800 series, FR-A800 Plus series, and FR-F800 series. Pulse train input values from terminal JOG can be read with the PLC function. To read pulse train input values with the PLC function, set the terminal JOG by setting Pr.291 Pulse train I/O selection = "1, 11, 21, or 100" and Pr.384 Input pulse division scaling factor = "0 (initial value)". After setting terminal JOG, set SD1240 to "1" to start counting the number of sampling pulses and accumulated count values. Pulse train (the number of sampling pulses) from terminal JOG is stored to SD1236. When the sampling pulses overflow, make adjustment with the setting of Pr. 416 and Pr. 417. The number of sampling pulses= the number of input pulses per count cycle pre-scale setting value (Pr. 417) increments scaling factor (Pr. 416)

*1 The settings of "10, 11, 20, 21, and 100" are available only for the FM type.

Parameter Name Initial value

Setting range Description

291 Pulse train I/O selection

0 0, 10, 20*1 Terminal JOG

1, 11, 21, 100*1 Pulse train input

416 Pre-scale function selection

0 0 to 5 Pre-scale function selection (increments scaling factor) 0: No function 1: 1 2: 0.1 3: 0.01 4: 0.001 5: 0.0001

417 Pre-scale setting value 1 0 to 32767 Set the pre-scale value to calculate the number of sampling pulse when inputting the pulse train.

Device number Name Setting range Description SD1236 Pulse train input sampling pulse 0 to 32767 The number of pulses counted in count cycle is stored. SD1237 Pulse train input cumulative count

value L 0 to 99999999 The cumulative value of the number of sampling pulses is

stored. SD1238 Pulse train input cumulative count

value H SD1239 Reset request of pulse train input

count 0 Not clear 1 Count clear

SD1240 Count start of the pulse train input 0 Stop counting 1 Start counting

671. PLC FUNCTION 1.14 Pulse train input function

6

1.15 PID control For FR-A800/FR-A800 Plus/FR-F800 series Set Pr.128 (Pr.753) to enable setting of set point/ deviation and measured value for PID control with PLC function. PID operation is performed using the value of SD1248 (SD1308) as the set point/deviation, and the value of SD1249 (SD1309) as the measured value. The manipulated amount will be stored in SD1250 (SD1310). To perform first PID control using the PLC function, set "1" in SD1255. When "14 (80)" is set in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) to assign the X14 (X80) signal, turn ON X14 (X80) and set "1" in SD1255. When Pr.128 = "70, 71, 80, or 81", PID operation is performed after the start. Thus, even if "1" is set in SD1255, the manipulated amount of SD1250 remains the same and the value of SD1250 is unchanged from "0". When Pr.128 = "90, 91, 100, or 101" and "1" is set in SD1255, PID operation is performed and the operation result is applied to the manipulated amount SD1250. Set Pr.753 to enable the second PID control (SD1308 to SD1310).

Parameter Name Initial value

Setting range Description

128 753

PID action selection

0 0 PID control disabled 10, 11, 20, 21, 40 to 43, 50, 51, 60, 61, 1000, 1001, 1010, 1011, 2000, 2001, 2010, 2011

For details, refer to the Instruction Manual of the inverter.

70 PID reverse action

Deviation signal input (PLC function)

71 PID forward action

80 PID reverse action

Measured value and set point input (PLC function)

81 PID forward action

90 PID reverse action

Deviation signal input (PLC function) Not applied to inverter output frequency.

91 PID forward action

100 PID reverse action

Measured value and set point input (PLC function) Not applied to inverter output frequency.101 PID forward

action

Device number Name Setting range Description SD1248 PID control set point/

deviation Set point: 0 to 100% *1 Deviation: -100 to 100%

Set the PID set point or the PID deviation (in 0.01% increments *1).

SD1249 PID control measured value 0 to 100% *1 Set the PID measured value (in 0.01% increments *1). SD1250 PID control manipulated

amount -100 to 100% Stores the PID manipulated amount (in 0.01%

increments). SD1255 PID operation control 0 Stops PID control.

1 Starts first PID control. 2 Starts second PID control 3 Starts the first and second PID controls.

SD1308 Second PID control set point/ deviation

Set point: 0 to 100% *1 Deviation: -100 to 100%

Set the second PID set point or the second PID deviation (in 0.01% increments *1).

SD1309 Second PID control measured value

0 to 100% *1 Set the second PID measured value (in 0.01% increments*1).

SD1310 Second PID control manipulated amount

-100 to 100% Stores the second PID manipulated amount (in 0.01% increments).

SD1248 (SD1308)

SD1249 (SD1309)

PID set point/ PID deviation

PID manipulated variable SD1250 (SD1310) or Inverter frequency settingPID measurement

value

PID control

8 1. PLC FUNCTION 1.15 PID control

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

*1 When both Pr.934 and Pr.935 are set to values other than "9999", the set point of SD1248 (SD1308) and the measured value of SD1249 (SD1309) are set as coefficients. The setting range is from the smaller coefficient to the larger one set in Pr.934 and Pr.935. (For details of Pr.934 and Pr.935, refer to the Instruction Manual of the inverter.)

NOTE Depending on the setting value of Pr.128 (Pr.753), SD1248 (SD1308) automatically switches between set point and

deviation. When Pr.128 (Pr.753) is set to deviation input "70, 71, 90, or 91", the value set as the measured value in (SD1249

(SD1309)) becomes invalid. If an out-of-range value is set, the maximum value (or the minimum value) of the setting range is used for operation.

691. PLC FUNCTION 1.15 PID control

7

For FR-E800 series Set Pr.128 to enable setting of set point/ deviation and measured value for PID control with PLC function. PID operation is performed using the value of SD1248 as the set point/deviation, and the value of SD1249 as the measured value. The manipulated amount will be stored in SD1250. To perform first PID control using the PLC function, set "1" in SD1255. When "14" is set in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) to assign the X14 signal, turn ON X14 and set "1" in SD1255. When X14 is not set to the input terminal function selection, start/stop of the operation can be set with bit 0 of SD1255.

*1 When both Pr.934 and Pr.935 are set to values other than "9999", the set point of SD1248 and the measured value of SD1249 are set as coefficients. The setting range is from the smaller coefficient to the larger one set in Pr.934 and Pr.935. (For details on Pr.934 and Pr.935, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).)

NOTE Depending on the setting value of Pr.128, SD1248 automatically switches between set point and deviation. If an out-of-range value is set, the maximum value (or the minimum value) of the setting range is used for operation.

Parameter Name Initial value

Setting range Description

128 PID action selection

0 0 PID control disabled 20, 21, 40 to 43, 50, 51, 60, 61 For details, refer to the Instruction Manual of the inverter. 1000 PID reverse

action Set point/measured value input

1001 PID forward action

1010 PID reverse action

Deviation input

1011 PID forward action

2000 PID reverse action

Set point/measured value input (without frequency reflected)

2001 PID forward action

2010 PID reverse action

Deviation input (without frequency reflected)

2011 PID forward action

Device number Name Setting range Description SD1248 PID control set point/

deviation Set point: 0 to 100% *1 Deviation: -100 to 100%

Set the PID set point or the PID deviation (in 0.01% increments *1).

SD1249 PID control measured value 0 to 100% *1 Set the PID measured value (in 0.01% increments *1). SD1250 PID control manipulated

amoun -100 to 100% Stores the PID manipulated amount (in 0.01%

increments). SD1255 PID operation control 0 Stops PID control.

1 Starts PID control.

SD1248

SD1249

PID set point/ PID deviation

PID manipulated variable SD1250 or Inverter frequency settingPID measurement

value

PID control

0 1. PLC FUNCTION 1.15 PID control

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1.16 Clearing the flash memory of the PLC function Set Pr.498 to "9696" to clear the flash memory used for the PLC function.

If the file password (registered by FR Configurator2 (Developer)) of the PLC function has been forgotten, use Pr.498 to clear the flash memory and unlock the file password.

The flash memory can only be cleared when the PLC function is disabled (Pr.414 ="0"). Setting Pr.498 = "9696" clears the flash memory. It takes approximately 30 s at the maximum to clear the flash memory. When the flash memory clearing is completed, the Pr.498 value changes to "0" to notify the completion. Check if Pr.498 = "0" before turning OFF the inverter power or performing an inverter reset after the flash memory is

cleared. When the inverter power is turned OFF or an inverter reset is performed during the flash memory clearing operation, the

flash memory is not cleared properly. The read value of Pr.498 becomes "9696" when the flash memory clearing has not been completed properly due to turning OFF of the power or the inverter reset. If the read value of Pr.498 becomes "9696", clear the flash memory according to the following procedure.

FR-DU08 Set Pr.498 = "0". Then, set Pr.498 = "9696" again to retry clearing. FR-LU08 or FR-PU07 Set Pr.498 = "9696" again to retry clearing.

NOTE Executing this function clears the PLC function program and all parameters of the PLC function. Create the program and

set the parameters of the PLC function again. While the PLC function is enabled (Pr.414 = "1 or 2"), setting Pr.498 = "9696" does not clear the flash memory. When the

flash memory clearing is attempted while the PLC function is enabled, the Pr.498 value changes to "1" to notify that the PLC function is enabled. Disable the PLC function (Pr.414 = "0"). After the inverter is reset, retry clearing.

If a value other than "0 or 9696" is set in Pr.498, Er1 (write disable error) will occur.

Pr. Name Initial value

Setting range

Description

498 PLC function flash memory clear 0 0, 9696 (0 to 9999)

0: Clears the flash memory fault display (no operation after writing while the flash memory is in normal operation).

Write

9696: Clears the flash memory (no operation after writing during flash memory fault). Other than 0 and 9696: Outside of the setting range 0: Normal display Read 1: The flash memory has not been cleared because the PLC function is enabled. 9696: During flash memory clearing operation or flash memory fault

711. PLC FUNCTION 1.16 Clearing the flash memory of the PLC function

7

1.17 Constant scan A constant scan time can be maintained for the sequence programs. Configure the setting using FR Configurator2 (Developer).

A waiting time is automatically set so that the sum of the execution time of the sequence programs and the waiting time is equal to the set constant scan time.

PLC parameter: Although the setting range of PLC RAS setting is 0.5 ms to 2000 ms, the actual set constant scan time is a minimum of 10 ms. (Increments: 10 ms)

I/O timing After END processing is completed, a waiting time is automatically set as shown below.

NOTE Processes other than the PLC function are executed even during the waiting time. The set constant scan time must meet the following condition:

Set watchdog timer time > set constant scan time > maximum scan time of program. If a scan time is longer than the set constant scan time, "PRG.TIME OVER Error code: 5010" occurs. In this case, the

constant scan setting is ignored in the operation. If a scan time is longer than the set watchdog timer time, a watchdog timer error is detected and execution of the sequence

program stops. (Refer to page 46.) Only the "Execute it while waiting for constant scan setting" is enabled for the service processing setting. Settings other

than "Execute it while waiting for constant scan setting" are ignored and no error occurs even if they are set. Scan time monitoring in FR Configurator2 (Developer) monitors the scan time including the waiting time for constant scan.

PLC parameter Name Initial value Setting range PLC RAS setting Constant scan setting None 0.5 ms to 2000 ms

Setting value Set constant scan time 0.5 ms to 10.0 ms 10ms 10.5 ms to 20.0 ms 20ms ... ... 1990.5 ms to 2000.0 ms 2000ms

Constant scan: operation when set to 10 ms.

Program execution END processing

Waiting time

10ms10ms10ms

8ms7ms 7ms 3ms3ms 2ms

2 1. PLC FUNCTION 1.17 Constant scan

731.PLC FUNCTION 1.17 Constant scan

7

4 1. PLC FUNCTION 1.17 Constant scan

CHAPTER 2

C H

A PT

ER 2

4

5

CC-LINK COMMUNICATION

6

7

8

9

10

2.1 System configuration ..............................................................................................................................................74 2.2 CC-Link parameter .................................................................................................................................................76 2.3 CC-Link I/O specifications ......................................................................................................................................77 2.4 Buffer memory ........................................................................................................................................................88

73

7

2 CC-LINK COMMUNICATION

2.1 System configuration

2.1.1 System configuration example Programmable controller side

Mount the "CC-Link system master/local module" on the main base unit or extension base unit that uses the programmable controller CPU as the master station.

Use the CC-Link dedicated cable to connect the CC-Link programmable controller module (master station) to the inverter.

NOTE For details on CC-Link communication wiring and the CC-Link cable, refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR-A8NC.

Inverter

Motor Motor Power supply

Inverter

Power supply

Master station

QJ61BT11N, etc.

CC-Link dedicated cable

Terminating resistor

Up to 42 units can be connected

when only inverters are connected

Remote device station

Terminating resistor

4 2. CC-LINK COMMUNICATION 2.1 System configuration

3

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Function block diagram The following function blocks explain the I/O information flow to and from the inverter in CC-Link.

Link refresh between the master station of CC-Link system and the inverter is continuously performed at 3.5 to 18 ms (512 points).

I/O refresh and the sequence program of the master station are executed asynchronously. Data read from the inverter is read from the buffer memory of the CC-Link system master/local module using FROM

instruction. Data to be written to the inverter is written to the buffer memory of the CC-Link system master/local module using TO

instruction.

NOTE Programs cannot be read or written via CC-Link communication.

The differences between the normal CC-Link communication (Pr.544 = "1, 12, 14, 18, 24, or 28") and the CC-Link communication with the PLC function (Pr.544 = "100, 112, 114, 118, or 128") are shown below. In the FR-A800, FR-A800 Plus, and FR-F800 series, Pr.544 can be set to "24", "28", and "128".

1) CC-Link module I/O signals

I/O signals assigned to the CC-Link system master/local module. These signals are for communication between the programmable controller CPU and the CC-Link system master/local module.

2) Reading from/writing to the buffer memory

Information that is input to the inverter can be read, and output information can be written. FROM/TO instruction of the sequence program enables reading from/writing to the buffer memory. For details on the buffer memory, refer to page 88.

3) CC-Link dedicated cable The PLC link start instruction is sent from the sequence program. After PLC link starts, link refresh is continuously performed asynchronously with execution of the sequence program.

4) Sequence program The sequence program exchanges I/O information between the CC-Link system master/local module and the inverter CPU.

5) I/O information The CC-Link system master/local module and the inverter CPU exchange I/O information. (When CC-Link is not used, only 5) is performed and 1) to 4) are not related to the operation.)

1) C PU

Buffer memory

2)

3) Input signal

InverterCC-Link master module

4)

Output signal

5)

P LC

C P

U

In te

rfa ce

w ith

P LC

C C

-L in

k in

te rfa

ce

C C

-L in

k in

te rfa

ce

S eq

ue nc

e pr

og ra

m

C P

U

I/O (RX, RY)

I/O (RX, RY)

RW w RWr RWw RWr

Inverter Pr.544 = 0,1,12,14,18,24,28

FR-A8NC

Parameter read/write, monitor, operation commands, etc. have been assigned in advance.

Pr.544 = 100,112,114,118,128

Sequence program

User assignment

The user must assign parameters, monitors, etc. using sequence programs. Other data read/write, etc. can be assigned freely as user areas. Operation and speed commands have been assigned in advance.

FR-A8NC

Inverter

P LC

C P

U C

C -L

in k

m as

te r m

od ul

e

P LC

C P

U C

C -L

in k

m as

te r m

od ul

e

C P

U

C P

U

752. CC-LINK COMMUNICATION 2.1 System configuration

7

2.2 CC-Link parameter

2.2.1 CC-Link extended setting (Pr.544) The functions of the remote register can be extended.

*1 The program used for the conventional series inverter option (FR-A5NC) can be used. *2 When using the double, quadruple, or octuple settings of the CC-Link Ver.2, station data of the master station must be set to double, quadruple,

or octuple. (If the master station is CC-Link Ver.1, this setting is not available.) *3 The value is valid only for the FR-A800 series, FR-A800 Plus series, and FR-F800 series. *4 For the CC-Link IE TSN communication with the FR-E800 series, the parameter functions as "118" (CC-Link Ver.2, one station occupied, octuple)

is set even though Pr.544 = "100", "112", or "114". *5 For the CC-Link IE TSN communication with the FR-E800 series, settings are as follows when Pr.544 = "138": CC-Link Ver.2, one station

occupied, octuple, user defined cyclic communication data selected (PLC function). For communication other than the CC-Link IE TSN communication, the parameter functions as "118" (CC-Link Ver.2, one station occupied, octuple) is set even though Pr.544 = "138".

*6 The value is valid only for the FR-E800 series.

NOTE The setting becomes valid after inverter reset. For the CC-Link IE TSN communication with the FR-A800 or FR-F800 series, setting Pr.544 is not required.

Parameter number

Name Initial value

Setting range

CC-Link Ver. Description

544 CC-Link extended setting

0 0 1 Occupies one station (FR-A5NC compatible) *1

1 Occupies one station

12 *2 2 Occupies one station, double

14 *2 Occupies one station, quadruple

18 *2 Occupies one station, octuple

24 *2*3 Occupies one station, quadruple

28 *2*3 Occupies one station, octuple

38 *2*6 Occupies one station, octuple, user defined cyclic communication data selected

100*4 1 Occupies one station (PLC function)

112 *2*4 2 Occupies one station, double (PLC function)

114 *2*4 Occupies one station, quadruple (PLC function)

118 *2*4 Occupies one station, octuple (PLC function)

128 *2*3 Occupies one station, octuple (PLC function)

138 *2*5*6 Occupies one station, octuple (PLC function), user defined cyclic communication data selected

6 2. CC-LINK COMMUNICATION 2.2 CC-Link parameter

3

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

2.3 CC-Link I/O specifications

2.3.1 I/O signals when one station in the CC-Link Ver.1 is occupied (Pr.544 = "100")

The number of device points available in CC-Link communication are 32 input (RX) points (14 points for the PLC function), 32 output (RY) points (16 points for the PLC function), 4 remote register (RWr) points, and 4 remote register (RWw) points.

Remote I/O (for FR-A800, FR-A800 Plus, FR-F800 series) PLC function

device number Remote output device number

Signal name PLC function device number

Remote input device number

Signal name

X30 RYn0 Forward rotation command*2

RXn0 Forward rotating

X31 RYn1 Reverse rotation command*2

RXn1 Reverse rotating

X32 RYn2 High-speed operation command (Terminal RH function)*1

Y32 RXn2 Running (Terminal RUN function)*4

X33 RYn3 Middle-speed operation command (Terminal RM function)*1

Y33 RXn3 Up to frequency (Terminal SU function)*4

X34 RYn4 Low-speed operation command (Terminal RL function)*1

Y34 RXn4 Overload alarm (Terminal OL function)*4*6

X35 RYn5 JOG operation command (Terminal JOG function)*1

Y35 RXn5 Instantaneous power failure (Terminal IPF function)*4*7

X36 RYn6 Second function selection (Terminal RT function)*1

Y36 RXn6 Frequency detection (Terminal FU function)*4

X37 RYn7 Current input selection (Terminal AU function)*1

Y37 RXn7 Fault (Terminal ABC1 function)*4

X38 RYn8 Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure (Terminal CS function)*1*3

Y38 RXn8 (Terminal ABC2 function)*4

X39 RYn9 Output stop*2 Y39 RXn9 Pr.313 assignment function (DO0)*5

X3A RYnA Start self-holding selection (Terminal STP (STOP) function)*1

Y3A RXnA Pr.314 assignment function (DO1)*5

X3B RYnB Reset (Terminal RES function)*1

Y3B RXnB Pr.315 assignment function (DO2)*5

X3C RYnC General-purpose remote input for PLC function

Y3C RXnC General-purpose remote output for PLC functionX3D RYnD Y3D RXnD

X3E RYnE Y3E RXnE X3F RYnF Y3F RXnF RY (n+1) 0

to RY (n+1) 7

Reserved RX (n+1) 0 to RX (n+1) 7

Reserved

RY (n+1) 8 Unused (Initial data process completion flag)

RX (n+1)8 Unused (Initial data process request flag)

RY (n+1) 9 Unused (Initial data process request flag)

RX (n+1) 9 Unused (Initial data process completion flag)

RY (n+1) A Error reset request flag RX (n+1) A Error status flag RY (n+1) B

to RY (n+1) F

Reserved RX (n+1) B Remote station ready RX (n+1) C to RX (n+1) F

Reserved

772. CC-LINK COMMUNICATION 2.3 CC-Link I/O specifications

7

("n" indicates a value determined by the station number setting.) *1 This signal is assigned in the initial status. Used for general-purpose remote input in the PLC function by setting "9999" in any of Pr.180 to Pr.186,

Pr.188, or Pr.189. *2 The signals of RYn0, RYn1, and RYn9 cannot be changed. Signals changed using Pr.178, Pr.179, and Pr.187 are invalid. However, RYn9 is

used for general-purpose remote input in the PLC function by setting "9999" in Pr.187 when the Ethernet communication (CC-Link IE Field Network Basic) is selected. For details on Pr.178 to Pr.189, refer to the Instruction Manual of the inverter.

*3 For the FR-F800 series, no function is assigned in the initial setting. *4 This signal is assigned in the initial status. Used for general-purpose remote output in the PLC function by setting "9999" in any of Pr.190 to

Pr.196. For details on Pr.190 to Pr.196, refer to the Instruction Manual of the inverter. *5 Output signals can be assigned using Pr.313 to Pr.315.

For details on the signals, refer to the description of Pr.190 to Pr.196 in the Instruction Manual of the inverter. *6 When "9999" is set in Pr.192, the device operates as Instantaneous power failure (IPF signal). *7 When "9999" is set in Pr.193, the device operates as Overload warning (OL signal).

Remote I/O (for FR-E800 series) PLC function

device number Remote output device number

Signal name PLC function device number

Remote input device number

Signal name

X30 RYn0 Forward rotation command*2

RXn0 Forward rotating

X31 RYn1 Reverse rotation command*2

RXn1 Reverse rotating

X32 RYn2 High-speed operation command (Terminal RH function)*1

Y32 RXn2 Running (Terminal RUN function)*3

X33 RYn3 Middle-speed operation command (Terminal RM function)*1

RXn3 Up to frequency (SU signal) *2

X34 RYn4 Low-speed operation command (Terminal RL function)*1

RXn4 Overload alarm (OL signal) *2

X35 RYn5 Reserved Y35 RXn5 No function (Terminal NET Y1 function) *3

X36 RYn6 Y36 RXn6 Frequency detection (Terminal FU function)*3

X37 RYn7 Y37 RXn7 Fault (Terminal ABC function)*3

X38 RYn8 No function (Terminal NET X1 function) *1

Y38 RXn8 No function (Terminal NET Y2 function) *3

X39 RYn9 Output stop (Terminal MRS function)*1

Y39 RXn9 Pr.313 assignment function (DO0)*4

X3A RYnA No function (Terminal NET X2 function) *1

Y3A RXnA Pr.314 assignment function (DO1)*4

X3B RYnB Reset (Terminal RES function)*1

Y3B RXnB Pr.315 assignment function (DO2)*4

X3C RYnC General-purpose remote input for PLC function

Y3C RXnC General-purpose remote output for PLC functionX3D RYnD Y3D RXnD

X3E RYnE Y3E RXnE X3F RYnF Y3F RXnF RY (n+1) 0

to RY (n+1) 7

Reserved RX (n+1) 0 to RX (n+1) 5

Reserved

RX (n+1) 6 No function (Terminal NET Y3 function) *3

RX (n+1) 7 No function (Terminal NET Y4 function) *3

RY (n+1) 8 Unused (Initial data process completion flag)

RX (n+1) 8 Unused (Initial data process request flag)

8 2. CC-LINK COMMUNICATION 2.3 CC-Link I/O specifications

3

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

("n" indicates a value determined by the station number setting.) *1 This signal is assigned in the initial status. Used for general-purpose remote input in the PLC function by setting "9999" in any of Pr.180 to Pr.189. *2 The signals are fixed. They cannot be changed using parameters. However, RYn9 is used for general-purpose remote input in the PLC function

by setting "9999" in Pr.183 when the Ethernet communication (CC-Link IE Field Network Basic) is selected. For details on Pr.178 to Pr.189, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).

*3 This signal is assigned in the initial status. Used for general-purpose remote output in the PLC function by setting "9999" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196. For details on Pr.190 to Pr.196, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).

*4 Output signals can be assigned using Pr.313 to Pr.315. For details on the signals, refer to the descriptions of Pr.190 to Pr.196 in the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).

Remote register

("n" indicates a value determined by the station number setting.)

I/O figure

NOTE All remote registers are user areas and can be used freely.

RY (n+1) 9 Unused (Initial data process request flag)

RX (n+1) 9 Unused (Initial data process completion flag)

RY (n+1) A Error reset request flag RX (n+1) A Error status flag RY (n+1) B No function

(Terminal NET X3 function) *1

RX (n+1) B Remote station ready

RY (n+1) C No function (Terminal NET X4 function) *1

RX (n+1) C to RX (n+1) F

Reserved

RY (n+1) D No function (Terminal NET X5 function) *1

RY (n+1) E to RY (n+1) F

Reserved

PLC function device number

Address Description PLC function device number

Address Description

SD1062 RWwn Registers for reading data received from the master station.

SD1078 RWrn Registers for writing data to be sent to the master station.

SD1063 RWwn+1 SD1079 RWrn+1 SD1064 RWwn+2 SD1080 RWrn+2 SD1065 RWwn+3 SD1081 RWrn+3

PLC function device number

Remote output device number

Signal name PLC function device number

Remote input device number

Signal name

Devices for CC-Link (station No. 1)

RY00 to 0F

RX00 to 0F

RWw0 RWw1 RWw2 RWw3

RWr0 RWr1 RWr2 RWr3

Devices for PLC function X30 to 3F

Y30 to 3F

SD1062 SD1063 SD1064 SD1065

SD1078 SD1079 SD1080 SD1081

Automatically refreshed at every END.

Inverter

Master station

792. CC-LINK COMMUNICATION 2.3 CC-Link I/O specifications

8

2.3.2 I/O signals when the double setting is set in CC-Link Ver.2 (Pr.544 = "112")

The number of device points available in CC-Link communication are 32 input (RX) points (10 points for the PLC function), 32 output (RY) points (12 points for the PLC function), 4 remote register (RWr) points, and 4 remote register (RWw) points.

Remote I/O (for FR-A800, FR-A800 Plus, FR-F800 series) PLC function

device number Remote output device number

Signal name PLC function device number

Remote input device number

Signal name

X30 RYn0 Forward rotation command*2

RXn0 Forward rotating

X31 RYn1 Reverse rotation command*2

RXn1 Reverse rotating

X32 RYn2 High-speed operation command (Terminal RH function)*1

Y32 RXn2 Running (Terminal RUN function)*4

X33 RYn3 Middle-speed operation command (Terminal RM function)*1

Y33 RXn3 Up to frequency (Terminal SU function)*4

X34 RYn4 Low-speed operation command (Terminal RL function)*1

Y34 RXn4 Overload alarm (Terminal OL function)*4*6

X35 RYn5 JOG operation command (Terminal JOG function)*1

Y35 RXn5 Instantaneous power failure (Terminal IPF function) *4*7

X36 RYn6 Second function selection (Terminal RT function)*1

Y36 RXn6 Frequency detection (Terminal FU function)*4

X37 RYn7 Current input selection (Terminal AU function) *1

Y37 RXn7 Fault (Terminal ABC function)*4

X38 RYn8 Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure (Terminal CS function)*1*3

Y38 RXn8 (Terminal ABC2 function)*4

X39 RYn9 Output stop*2 Y39 RXn9 Pr.313 assignment function (DO0)*5

X3A RYnA Start self-holding selection (Terminal STP (STOP) function)*1

Y3A RXnA Pr.314 assignment function (DO1)*5

X3B RYnB Reset (Terminal RES function)*1

Y3B RXnB Pr.315 assignment function (DO2)*5

RYnC Monitor command RXnC Monitoring RYnD Frequency setting

command (RAM) RXnD Frequency setting

completion (RAM) RYnE Frequency setting

command (RAM, EEPROM)

RXnE Frequency setting completion (RAM, EEPROM)

RYnF Instruction code execution request

RXnF Instruction code execution completion

RY(n+1)0 to RY(n+1)7

Reserved RX(n+1)0 to RX(n+1)7

Reserved

RY(n+1)8 Unused (Initial data process completion flag)

Unused (Initial data process request flag)

RY(n+1)9 Unused (Initial data process request flag)

RX(n+1)9 Unused (Initial data process completion flag)

RY(n+1)A Error reset request flag RX(n+1)A Error status flag

0 2. CC-LINK COMMUNICATION 2.3 CC-Link I/O specifications

3

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

("n" indicates a value determined by the station number setting.) *1 This signal is assigned in the initial status. Used for general-purpose remote input in the PLC function by setting "9999" in any of Pr.180 to Pr.186,

Pr.188, or Pr.189. *2 The signals of RYn0, RYn1, and RYn9 cannot be changed. Signals changed using Pr.178, Pr.179, and Pr.187 are invalid. However, RYn9 is

used for general-purpose remote input in the PLC function by setting "9999" in Pr.187 when the Ethernet communication (CC-Link IE Field Network Basic) is selected. For details on Pr.178 to Pr.189, refer to the Instruction Manual of the inverter.

*3 For the FR-F800 series, no function is assigned in the initial setting. *4 This signal is assigned in the initial status. Used for general-purpose remote output in the PLC function by setting "9999" in any of Pr.190 to

Pr.196. For details on Pr.190 to Pr.196, refer to the Instruction Manual of the inverter. *5 Output signals can be assigned using Pr.313 to Pr.315.

For details on the signals, refer to the description of Pr.190 to Pr.196 in the Instruction Manual of the inverter. *6 When "9999" is set in Pr.192, the device operates as Instantaneous power failure (IPF signal). *7 When "9999" is set in Pr.193, the device operates as Overload warning (OL signal).

Remote I/O (for FR-E800 series)

RY(n+1)B to RY(n+1)F

Reserved RX(n+1)B Remote station ready RX(n+1)C to RX(n+1)F

Reserved

PLC function device number

Remote output device number

Signal name PLC function device number

Remote output device number

Signal name

X30 RYn0 Forward rotation command*2

RXn0 Forward rotating

X31 RYn1 Reverse rotation command*2

RXn1 Reverse rotating

X32 RYn2 High-speed operation command (Terminal RH function)*1

Y32 RXn2 Running (Terminal RUN function)*3

X33 RYn3 Middle-speed operation command (Terminal RM function)*1

RXn3 Up to frequency (SU signal) *2

X34 RYn4 Low-speed operation command (Terminal RL function)*1

RXn4 Overload alarm (OL signal) *2

X35 RYn5 Reserved Y35 RXn5 No function (Terminal NET Y1 function) *3

X36 RYn6 Y36 RXn6 Frequency detection (Terminal FU function)*3

X37 RYn7 Y37 RXn7 Fault (Terminal ABC function)*3

X38 RYn8 No function (Terminal NET X1 function) *1

Y38 RXn8 No function (Terminal NET Y2 function) *3

X39 RYn9 Output stop (Terminal MRS function)*1

Y39 RXn9 Pr.313 assignment function (DO0)*4

X3A RYnA No function (Terminal NET X2 function) *1

Y3A RXnA Pr.314 assignment function (DO1)*4

X3B RYnB Reset (Terminal RES function)*1

Y3B RXnB Pr.315 assignment function (DO2)*4

X3C RYnC Monitor command RXnC Monitoring X3D RYnD Frequency setting

command (RAM) RXnD Frequency setting

completion (RAM) X3E RYnE Frequency setting

command (RAM, EEPROM) RXnE Frequency setting

completion (RAM, EEPROM)

X3F RYnF Instruction code execution request

RXnF Instruction code execution completion

PLC function device number

Remote output device number

Signal name PLC function device number

Remote input device number

Signal name

812. CC-LINK COMMUNICATION 2.3 CC-Link I/O specifications

8

("n" indicates a value determined by the station number setting.) *1 This signal is assigned in the initial status. Used for general-purpose remote input in the PLC function by setting "9999" in any of Pr.180 to Pr.189. *2 The signals are fixed. They cannot be changed using parameters. However, RYn9 is used for general-purpose remote input in the PLC function

by setting "9999" in Pr.183 when the Ethernet communication (CC-Link IE Field Network Basic) is selected. For details on Pr.178 to Pr.189, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).

*3 This signal is assigned in the initial status. Used for general-purpose remote output in the PLC function by setting "9999" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196. For details on Pr.190 to Pr.196, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).

*4 Output signals can be assigned using Pr.313 to Pr.315. For details on the signals, refer to the descriptions of Pr.190 to Pr.196 in the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).

Remote register

("n" indicates a value determined by the station number setting.) *1 During torque control under Real sensorless vector control or vector control for the FR-A800 series and FR-A800 Plus series (Pr.804 = "3 or 5") *2 During torque control under Real sensorless vector control or Vector control for the FR-E800 series (Pr.804 = "3 or 5")

RY(n+1)0 to RY(n+1)7

Reserved RX(n+1)0 to RX(n+1)5

Reserved

RX(n+1)6 No function (Terminal NET Y3 function) *3

RX(n+1)7 No function (Terminal NET Y4 function) *3

RY(n+1)8 Unused (Initial data process completion flag)

RX(n+1)8 Unused (Initial data process request flag)

RY(n+1)9 Unused (Initial data process request flag)

RX(n+1)9 Unused (Initial data process completion flag)

RY(n+1)A Error reset request flag RX(n+1)A Error status flag RY(n+1)B No function

(Terminal NET X3 function) *1

RX(n+1)B Remote station ready

RY(n+1)C No function (Terminal NET X4 function) *1

RX(n+1)C to RX(n+1)F

Reserved

RY(n+1)D No function (Terminal NET X5 function) *1

RY(n+1)E RY(n+1)F

Reserved

PLC function device number

Address Description PLC function device number

Address Description Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits

RWwn Monitor code 2 Monitor code 1 RWrn First monitor value RWwn + 1 Set frequency/torque

command*1*2

(0.01 Hz increments)

RWrn + 1 Second monitor value

RWwn + 2 Link parameter extended setting

Instruction code

RWrn + 2 Reply code 2 Reply code 1

RWwn + 3 Write data RWrn + 3 Read data SD1062 RWwn + 4 Registers for reading data

received from the master station. SD1078 RWrn + 4 Registers for writing data to be

sent to the master station.SD1063 RWwn + 5 SD1079 RWrn + 5 SD1064 RWwn + 6 SD1080 RWrn + 6 SD1065 RWwn + 7 SD1081 RWrn + 7

PLC function device number

Remote output device number

Signal name PLC function device number

Remote output device number

Signal name

2 2. CC-LINK COMMUNICATION 2.3 CC-Link I/O specifications

3

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

2.3.3 I/O signals when the quadruple setting is set in CC-Link Ver.2 (Pr. 544 = "114")

The number of device points available in CC-Link communication are 32 input (RX) points (12 points for the PLC function), 32 output (RY) points (12 points for the PLC function), 8 remote register (RWr) points, and 8 remote register (RWw) points.

Remote I/O Same as when Pr.544 = "112". (Refer to page 80.)

Remote register

("n" indicates a value determined by the station number setting.) *1 During torque control under Real sensorless vector control or vector control for the FR-A800 series and FR-A800 Plus series (Pr.804 = "3 or 5") *2 During torque control under Real sensorless vector control or Vector control for the FR-E800 series (Pr.804 = "3 or 5")

PLC function device number

Address Description PLC function device number

Address Description Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits

RWwn Monitor code 2 Monitor code 1 RWrn First monitor value RWwn + 1 Set frequency/torque

command*1*2

(0.01 Hz increments)

RWrn + 1 Second monitor value

RWwn + 2 Link parameter extended setting

Instruction code

RWrn + 2 Reply code 2 Reply code 1

RWwn + 3 Write data RWrn + 3 Read data RWwn + 4 Monitor code 3 RWrn + 4 Third monitor value RWwn + 5 Monitor code 4 RWrn + 5 Fourth monitor value RWwn + 6 Monitor code 5 RWrn + 6 Fifth monitor value RWwn + 7 Monitor code 6 RWrn + 7 Sixth monitor value SD1062 RWwn + 8 Registers for reading data

received from the master station. SD1078 RWrn + 8 Registers for writing data to be

sent to the master stationSD1063 RWwn + 9 SD1079 RWrn + 9 SD1064 RWwn + A SD1080 RWrn + A SD1065 RWwn + B SD1081 RWrn + B SD1066 RWwn + C SD1082 RWrn + C SD1067 RWwn + D SD1083 RWrn + D SD1068 RWwn + E SD1084 RWrn + E SD1069 RWwn + F SD1085 RWrn + F

832. CC-LINK COMMUNICATION 2.3 CC-Link I/O specifications

8

2.3.4 I/O signals when the octuple setting is set in CC-Link Ver.2 (Pr. 544 = "118 or 128")

The number of device points available in CC-Link communication are 32 input (RX) points (12 points for the PLC function), 32 output (RY) points (12 points for the PLC function), 16 remote register (RWr) points, and 16 remote register (RWw) points.

Remote I/O Same as when Pr.544 = "112". (Refer to page 80.)

Remote register

*1 Valid when Pr.128 = "40, 41, 60, 61, 140, or 141". *2 Valid when Pr.128 = "60 or 61". *3 Valid when Pr.128 = "50 or 51". *4 Applicable when Pr.544 ="118". *5 Applicable when Pr.544 ="128". (For the FR-A800, FR-A800 Plus series)

PLC function device number.

Address Description PLC function device number.

Address Description Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits

RWwn Monitor code 2 Monitor code 1 RWrn First monitor value RWwn + 1 Set frequency

(0.01 Hz increments) RWrn + 1 Second monitor value

RWwn + 2 Link parameter extended setting

Instruction code

RWrn + 2 Reply code 2 Reply code 1

RWwn + 3 Write data RWrn + 3 Read data RWwn + 4 Monitor code 3 RWrn + 4 Third monitor value RWwn + 5 Monitor code 4 RWrn + 5 Fourth monitor value RWwn + 6 Monitor code 5 RWrn + 6 Fifth monitor value RWwn + 7 Monitor code 6 RWrn + 7 Sixth monitor value RWwn + 8 Fault record

number H00 RWrn + 8 Fault record

number Fault record data

RWwn + 9 PID set point (0.01% increments)*1

RWrn + 9 Fault record (Output frequency)

RWwn + A PID measured value (0.01% increments)*2

RWrn + A Fault record (Output current)

RWwn + B PID deviation (0.01% increments)*3

RWrn + B Fault record (Output voltage)

RWwn + C Torque command or torque limit*4/ Torque command or torque limit (1st quadrant)*5

RWrn + C Fault record (Energization time)

RWwn + D H00 (Empty)*4/ Torque limit (2nd quadrant)*5

RWrn + D H00 (Empty)

RWwn + E H00 (Empty)*4/ Torque limit (3rd quadrant)*5

RWrn + E

RWwn + F H00 (Empty)*4/ Torque limit (4th quadrant)*5

RWrn + F

4 2. CC-LINK COMMUNICATION 2.3 CC-Link I/O specifications

3

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

("n" indicates a value determined by the station number setting.)

PLC function device number

Address Description PLC function device number

Address Description Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits

SD1062 RWwn + 10 Registers for reading data received from the master station.

SD1078 RWrn + 10 Registers for writing data to be sent to the master station.SD1063 RWwn + 11 SD1079 RWrn + 11

SD1064 RWwn + 12 SD1080 RWrn + 12 SD1065 RWwn + 13 SD1081 RWrn + 13 SD1066 RWwn + 14 SD1082 RWrn + 14 SD1067 RWwn + 15 SD1083 RWrn + 15 SD1068 RWwn + 16 SD1084 RWrn + 16 SD1069 RWwn + 17 SD1085 RWrn + 17 SD1070 RWwn + 18 SD1086 RWrn + 18 SD1071 RWwn + 19 SD1087 RWrn + 19 SD1072 RWwn + 1A SD1088 RWrn + 1A SD1073 RWwn + 1B SD1089 RWrn + 1B SD1074 RWwn + 1C SD1090 RWrn + 1C SD1075 RWwn + 1D SD1091 RWrn + 1D SD1076 RWwn + 1E SD1092 RWrn + 1E SD1077 RWwn + 1F SD1093 RWrn + 1F

852. CC-LINK COMMUNICATION 2.3 CC-Link I/O specifications

8

2.3.5 I/O signals for the CC-Link IE TSN communication (Pr.544 = "138")

The number of device points available in CC-Link communication are 32 input (RX) points (12 points for the PLC function), 32 output (RY) points (12 points for the PLC function), 16 remote register (RWr) points, and 16 remote register (RWw) points.

Remote I/O (for FR-E800 series) Same as when Pr.544 = "112". (Refer to page 77.) However, remote output device number RY (n+1)E is used for writing request for user defined cyclic communication input.

Remote register PLC function

device number. Address Description PLC function

device number. Address Description

Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits RWwn Monitor code 2 Monitor code 1 RWrn First monitor value RWwn + 1 Set frequency

(0.01 Hz increments) RWrn + 1 Second monitor value

RWwn + 2 Link parameter extended setting

Instruction code

RWrn + 2 Reply code 2 Reply code 1

RWwn + 3 Write data RWrn + 3 Read data RWwn + 4 User Defined Cyclic

Communication Input 1 Mapping (Pr.1320), lower

RWrn + 4 User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 1 Mapping (Pr.1330), lower

RWwn + 5 User Defined Cyclic Communication Input 1 Mapping (Pr.1320), upper

RWrn + 5 User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 1 Mapping (Pr.1330), upper

RWwn + 6 User Defined Cyclic Communication Input 1 Mapping (Pr.1321), lower

RWrn + 6 User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 1 Mapping (Pr.1331), lower

RWwn + 7 User Defined Cyclic Communication Input 1 Mapping (Pr.1321), upper

RWrn + 7 User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 1 Mapping (Pr.1331), upper

RWwn + 8 User Defined Cyclic Communication Input 1 Mapping (Pr.1322), lower

RWrn + 8 User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 1 Mapping (Pr.1332), lower

RWwn + 9 User Defined Cyclic Communication Input 1 Mapping (Pr.1322), upper

RWrn + 9 User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 1 Mapping (Pr.1332), upper

RWwn + A User Defined Cyclic Communication Input 1 Mapping (Pr.1323), lower

RWrn + A User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 1 Mapping (Pr.1333), lower

RWwn + B User Defined Cyclic Communication Input 1 Mapping (Pr.1323), upper

RWrn + B User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 1 Mapping (Pr.1333), upper

RWwn + C User Defined Cyclic Communication Input 1 Mapping (Pr.1324), lower

RWrn + C User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 1 Mapping (Pr.1334), lower

RWwn + D User Defined Cyclic Communication Input 1 Mapping (Pr.1324), upper

RWrn + D User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 1 Mapping (Pr.1334), upper

RWwn + E User Defined Cyclic Communication Input 1 Mapping (Pr.1325), lower

RWrn + E User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 1 Mapping (Pr.1335), lower

RWwn + F User Defined Cyclic Communication Input 1 Mapping (Pr.1325), upper

RWrn + F User Defined Cyclic Communication Output 1 Mapping (Pr.1335), upper

6 2. CC-LINK COMMUNICATION 2.3 CC-Link I/O specifications

3

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

("n" indicates a value determined by the station number setting.)

PLC function device number

Address Description PLC function device number

Address Description Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits

SD1062 RWwn + 10 Registers for reading data received from the master station.

SD1078 RWrn + 10 Registers for writing data to be sent to the master station.SD1063 RWwn + 11 SD1079 RWrn + 11

SD1064 RWwn + 12 SD1080 RWrn + 12 SD1065 RWwn + 13 SD1081 RWrn + 13 SD1066 RWwn + 14 SD1082 RWrn + 14 SD1067 RWwn + 15 SD1083 RWrn + 15 SD1068 RWwn + 16 SD1084 RWrn + 16 SD1069 RWwn + 17 SD1085 RWrn + 17 SD1070 RWwn + 18 SD1086 RWrn + 18 SD1071 RWwn + 19 SD1087 RWrn + 19 SD1072 RWwn + 1A SD1088 RWrn + 1A SD1073 RWwn + 1B SD1089 RWrn + 1B SD1074 RWwn + 1C SD1090 RWrn + 1C SD1075 RWwn + 1D SD1091 RWrn + 1D SD1076 RWwn + 1E SD1092 RWrn + 1E SD1077 RWwn + 1F SD1093 RWrn + 1F

872. CC-LINK COMMUNICATION 2.3 CC-Link I/O specifications

8

2.4 Buffer memory

2.4.1 Remote output signals (master station to inverter) Input statuses to the remote device station are stored. Each station uses two words.

(Do not use address 16n (n = 2 (X - 1) + 1, X = station number).)

Correspondence table of buffer memory addresses and station numbers of the master station

Station number

Buffer memory address

Station number

Buffer memory address

Station number

Buffer memory address

Station number

Buffer memory address

1 160H 17 180H 33 1A0H 49 1C0H 2 162H 18 182H 34 1A2H 50 1C2H 3 164H 19 184H 35 1A4H 51 1C4H 4 166H 20 186H 36 1A6H 52 1C6H 5 168H 21 188H 37 1A8H 53 1C8H 6 16AH 22 18AH 38 1AAH 54 1CAH 7 16CH 23 18CH 39 1ACH 55 1CCH 8 16EH 24 18EH 40 1AEH 56 1CEH 9 170H 25 190H 41 1B0H 57 1D0H 10 172H 26 192H 42 1B2H 58 1D2H 11 174H 27 194H 43 1B4H 59 1D4H 12 176H 28 196H 44 1B6H 60 1D6H 13 178H 29 198H 45 1B8H 61 1D8H 14 17AH 30 19AH 46 1BAH 62 1DAH 15 17CH 31 19CH 47 1BCH 63 1DCH 16 17EH 32 19EH 48 1BEH 64 1DEH

RY F to RY 0 RY 1F to RY 10

RY11F to RY110

RY 2F to RY 20 RY 3F to RY 30 RY 4F to RY 40 RY 5F to RY 50 RY 6F to RY 60 RY 7F to RY 70 RY 8F to RY 80 RY 9F to RY 90 RY AF to RY A0 RY BF to RY B0 RY CF to RY C0 RY DF to RY D0 RY EF to RY E0 RY FF to RY F0 RY10F to RY100

RY7CF to RY7C0 RY7DF to RY7D0 RY7EF to RY7E0 RY7FF to RY7F0

Remote inputs (RY) 160H

161H

162H

163H

164H

165H

166H

167H

168H

169H

16AH

16BH

16CH

16DH

16EH

16FH

170H

171H

172H

1DBH

1DCH

1DDH

1DEH

1DFH

to

Addresses For station No.1

For station No.63

Master Station Remote device station

(Station No. 1: 1 station occupied)

X3F to X30

PLC function

RY 0F to RY 00

Inverter

For station No.2 For station No.3 For station No.4 For station No.5

to

For station No.6 For station No.7 For station No.8 For station No.9

For station No.64

CC-Link

8 2. CC-LINK COMMUNICATION 2.4 Buffer memory

3

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

2.4.2 Remote input signals Pr.544 = "100" (inverter to master station)

Input statuses from the remote device station are stored. Each station uses two words.

(Do not use address En (n = 2 (X - 1) + 1, X = station number).)

Correspondence table of buffer memory addresses and station numbers of the master station

Station number

Buffer memory address

Station number

Buffer memory address

Station number

Buffer memory address

Station number

Buffer memory address

1 E0H 17 100H 33 120H 49 140H 2 E2H 18 102H 34 122H 50 142H 3 E4H 19 104H 35 124H 51 144H 4 E6H 20 106H 36 126H 52 146H 5 E8H 21 108H 37 128H 53 148H 6 EAH 22 10AH 38 12AH 54 14AH 7 ECH 23 10CH 39 12CH 55 14CH 8 EEH 24 10EH 40 12EH 56 14EH 9 F0H 25 110H 41 130H 57 150H 10 F2H 26 112H 42 132H 58 152H 11 F4H 27 114H 43 134H 59 154H 12 F6H 28 116H 44 136H 60 156H 13 F8H 29 118H 45 138H 61 158H 14 FAH 30 11AH 46 13AH 62 15AH 15 FCH 31 11CH 47 13CH 63 15CH 16 FEH 32 11EH 48 13EH 64 15EH

Y3F to Y30 RX 0F to RX 00RX F to RX 0 RX 1F to RX 10

RX11F to RX110

RX 2F to RX 20 RX 3F to RX 30 RX 4F to RX 40 RX 5F to RX 50 RX 6F to RX 60 RX 7F to RX 70 RX 8F to RX 80 RX 9F to RX 90 RX AF to RX A0 RX BF to RX B0 RX CF to RX C0 RX DF to RX D0 RX EF to RX E0 RX FF to RX F0 RX10F to RX100

to

RX7CF to RX7C0 RX7DF to RX7D0 RX7EF to RX7E0 RX7FF to RX7F0

Remote inputs (RX) E0H

E1H

E2H

E3H

E4H

E5H

E6H

E7H

E8H

E9H

EAH

EBH

ECH

EDH

EEH

EFH

F0H

F1H

F2H

15BH

15CH

15DH

15EH

15FH

to

Addresses For station No.1 For station No.2

For station No.63

Master station

For station No.3 For station No.4 For station No.5 For station No.6 For station No.7 For station No.8 For station No.9

For station No.64

Remote device station (Station No. 1: 1 station occupied) PLC function

Inverter CC-Link

892. CC-LINK COMMUNICATION 2.4 Buffer memory

9

2.4.3 Remote registers Pr.544 = "100" (master station to inverter)

Data to be sent to remote registers (RWw) of the remote device station are stored. Each station uses four words.

Correspondence table of buffer memory addresses and station numbers of the master station

Station number

Buffer memory address

Station number

Buffer memory address

Station number

Buffer memory address

Station number

Buffer memory address

1 1E0H to 1E3H 17 220H to 223H 33 260H to 263H 49 2A0H to 2A3H 2 1E4H to 1E7H 18 224H to 227H 34 264H to 267H 50 2A4H to 2A7H 3 1E8H to 1EBH 19 228H to 22BH 35 268H to 26BH 51 2A8H to 2ABH 4 1ECH to 1EFH 20 22CH to 22FH 36 26CH to 26FH 52 2ACH to 2AFH 5 1F0H to 1F3H 21 230H to 233H 37 270H to 273H 53 2B0H to 2B3H 6 1F4H to 1F7H 22 234H to 237H 38 274H to 277H 54 2B4H to 2B7H 7 1F8H to 1FBH 23 238H to 23BH 39 278H to 27BH 55 2B8H to 2BBH 8 1FCH to 1FFH 24 23CH to 23FH 40 27CH to 27FH 56 2BCH to 2BFH 9 200H to 203H 25 240H to 243H 41 280H to 283H 57 2C0H to 2C3H 10 204H to 207H 26 244H to 247H 42 284H to 287H 58 2C4H to 2C7H 11 208H to 20BH 27 248H to 24BH 43 288H to 28BH 59 2C8H to 2CBH 12 20CH to 20FH 28 24CH to 24FH 44 28CH to 28FH 60 2CCH to 2CFH 13 210H to 213H 29 250H to 253H 45 290H to 293H 61 2D0H to 2D3H 14 214H to 217H 30 254H to 257H 46 294H to 297H 62 2D4H to 2D7H 15 218H to 21BH 31 258H to 25BH 47 298H to 29BH 63 2D8H to 2DBH 16 21CH to 21FH 32 25CH to 25FH 48 29CH to 29FH 64 2DCH to 2DFH

Remote registers (RWw) 1E0H

1E1H

1E2H

1E3H

1E4H

1E5H

1E6H

1E7H

1E8H

1E9H

1EAH

1EBH

1ECH

1EDH

1EEH

1EFH

Addresses

Master station Remote device station

(Station No. 1: 1 station occupied)

RWW 0 RWW 1 RWW 2 RWW 3 RWW 4 RWW 5 RWW 6 RWW 7 RWW 8 RWW 9 RWW A RWW B RWW C RWW D RWW E RWW F

RWW FD RWW FC

RWW FE RWW FF

1F0H

2DBH

2DCH

2DDH

2DEH

2DFH

to

RWW 0 RWW 1 RWW 2 RWW 3

For station No.1

For station No.2

For station No.3

For station No.4

For station No.64

to

SD1063 SD1064 SD1065

SD1062

PLC function

Inverter CC-Link

0 2. CC-LINK COMMUNICATION 2.4 Buffer memory

3

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

2.4.4 Remote registers Pr.544 = "100" (inverter to master station)

Data sent from the remote registers (RWr) of the remote device station are stored. Each station uses four words.

Correspondence table of buffer memory addresses and station numbers of the master station

Station number

Buffer memory address

Station number

Buffer memory address

Station number

Buffer memory address

Station number

Buffer memory address

1 2E0H to 2E3H 17 320H to 323H 33 360H to 363H 49 3A0H to 3A3H 2 2E4H to 2E7H 18 324H to 327H 34 364H to 367H 50 3A4H to 3A7H 3 2E8H to 2EBH 19 328H to 32BH 35 368H to 36BH 51 3A8H to 3ABH 4 2ECH to 2EFH 20 32CH to 32FH 36 36CH to 36FH 52 3ACH to 3AFH 5 2F0H to 2F3H 21 330H to 333H 37 370H to 373H 53 3B0H to 3B3H 6 2F4H to 2F7H 22 334H to 337H 38 374H to 377H 54 3B4H to 3B7H 7 2F8H to 2FBH 23 338H to 33BH 39 378H to 37BH 55 3B8H to 3BBH 8 2FCH to 2FFH 24 33CH to 33FH 40 37CH to 37FH 56 3BCH to 3BFH 9 300H to 303H 25 340H to 343H 41 380H to 383H 57 3C0H to 3C3H 10 304H to 307H 26 344H to 347H 42 384H to 387H 58 3C4H to 3C7H 11 308H to 30BH 27 348H to 34BH 43 388H to 38BH 59 3C8H to 3CBH 12 30CH to 30FH 28 34CH to 34FH 44 38CH to 38FH 60 3CCH to 3CFH 13 310H to 313H 29 350H to 353H 45 390H to 393H 61 3D0H to 3D3H 14 314H to 317H 30 354H to 357H 46 394H to 397H 62 3D4H to 3D7H 15 318H to 31BH 31 358H to 35BH 47 398H to 39BH 63 3D8H to 3DBH 16 31CH to 31FH 32 35CH to 35FH 48 39CH to 39FH 64 3DCH to 3DFH

Master station

RWR 0 RWR 1 RWR 2 RWR 3

Remote registers (RWr) 2E0H

2E1H

2E2H

2E3H

2E4H

2E5H

2E6H

2E7H

2E8H

2E9H

2EAH

2EBH

2ECH

2EDH

2EEH

2EFH

Addresses RWR 0 RWR 1 RWR 2 RWR 3 RWR 4 RWR 5 RWR 6 RWR 7 RWR 8 RWR 9 RWR A RWR B RWR C RWR D RWR E RWR F

RWR FD RWR FC

RWR FE RWR FF

2F0H

3DBH

3DCH

3DDH

3DEH

3DFH

toto

For station No.4

For station No.1

For station No.2

For station No.3

For station No.64

Remote device station (Station No. 1: 1 station occupied)

SD1078 SD1079 SD1080 SD1081

PLC function

Inverter CC-Link

912. CC-LINK COMMUNICATION 2.4 Buffer memory

9

MEMO

2 2. CC-LINK COMMUNICATION 2.4 Buffer memory

CHAPTER 3

C H

A PT

ER 3

4

5

SEQUENCE PROGRAM

6

7

8

9

10

3.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................94 3.2 RUN/STOP operation .............................................................................................................................................96 3.3 Program configuration ............................................................................................................................................96 3.4 Programming language ..........................................................................................................................................97 3.5 Operation processing method of the PLC function .................................................................................................99 3.6 I/O processing method..........................................................................................................................................100 3.7 Scan time..............................................................................................................................................................102 3.8 Values that can be used in sequence programs...................................................................................................103 3.9 Explanation of devices..........................................................................................................................................105 3.10 Counter C .............................................................................................................................................................112 3.11 Data register D......................................................................................................................................................114 3.12 Special relays and special registers .....................................................................................................................115 3.13 Function list...........................................................................................................................................................116 3.14 RUN/STOP method of PLC function from an external source (remote RUN/STOP)............................................117 3.15 Watchdog timer (watchdog error supervision timer) .............................................................................................119 3.16 Self-diagnostic function.........................................................................................................................................120 3.17 Registering file password......................................................................................................................................121 3.18 Output (Y) status settings when STOP status RUN status ..............................................................................123 3.19 Structure of instructions ........................................................................................................................................124 3.20 Bit device processing method...............................................................................................................................126 3.21 Handling of numerical values................................................................................................................................129 3.22 Operation error .....................................................................................................................................................130 3.23 Sequence instructions list .....................................................................................................................................131 3.24 How to view instructions .......................................................................................................................................140 3.25 Sequence instructions ..........................................................................................................................................141 3.26 Basic instruction (16-bit) .......................................................................................................................................163 3.27 Basic instruction (32-bit) .......................................................................................................................................179 3.28 Application instructions (16-bit).............................................................................................................................196 3.29 Application instructions (32-bit).............................................................................................................................206 3.30 Display instruction.................................................................................................................................................217

93

9

3 SEQUENCE PROGRAM

3.1 Overview

3.1.1 Overview of operation The following description is of the overview of processing performed after the inverter is turned ON and through to execution of a sequence program. PLC function processing can roughly be classified into the following three types.

Initial processing Initial processing is pre-processing to execute sequence operations and is performed only once when the inverter is turned ON or reset.

Resets to initialize the input and output. Initializes the data memory (bit devices are turned OFF and word devices are set to 0). Performs self-diagnostic checks on such items as PLC function parameter settings and operation circuits.

NOTE PLC function can be checked via FR Configurator2 (Developer). (Refer to the Instruction Manual of FR Configurator2.)

Sequence program operation Executes a sequence program written in the PLC function from step 0 through the END instruction.

END processing End processing is post-processing to end operation processing of a sequence program once and return execution to step 0 in the sequence program.

Performs a self-diagnostic check. Updates timers and counters to the present values and turns contacts ON/OFF.

4 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.1 Overview

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

I/O initialization Data memory initialization Self-diagnostic checks

Step 0 to

Until execution of END instruction

END processing Self-diagnostic checks Updating of timer and counter present values and ON/OFF of their contacts

Power ON

Initial processing

I/O refresh processing

Sequence program operation processing

953. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.1 Overview

9

3.2 RUN/STOP operation The PLC function has two operating statuses, a RUN state and a STOP state. The following description is of operation processing of the PLC function in each state.

RUN state operation In the RUN state, the PLC function operates a sequence program in the sequence of step 0END (FEND) instructionstep 0 repeatedly when the SQ signal is turned ON. (P.RUN is ON) The output suspended in the STOP state is executed according to the PLC function parameter output mode set for STOPRUN switching (refer to page 123) when the PLC function enters the RUN state.

STOP state operation In the STOP state, the PLC function stops operating a sequence program when the SQ signal is turned OFF or the inverter is stopped remotely. (P.RUN is OFF) The PLC function saves the output status and turns OFF all output points when it enters the STOP state. Data other than the output (Y) is retained in the memory.

The PLC function performs I/O refresh processing in both RUN and STOP states. Therefore, input/output can be monitored and tested from peripheral devices even in the STOP state.

3.3 Program configuration Program classification Programs that can be used in the PLC function are main sequence programs only. Microcomputer programs, interrupt programs, and SFC programs cannot be used.

Program capacity The program capacity is the memory capacity that stores programs and is 6k steps (24k bytes). Set the program capacity using PLC function parameters (PLC parameters).

6 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.2 RUN/STOP operation

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

3.4 Programming language Programming the PLC function can be performed through two methods. One uses figures and the other uses dedicated instructions.

Programming with figures is performed by using the relay symbolic language. (Programming in FR Configurator2 (Developer) is performed in "ladder mode.")

Programming with dedicated instructions is performed by using the logic symbolic language. (Programming that uses FR Configurator2 (Developer) is performed in "list mode.")

The same program is created with both the relay symbolic language and the logic symbolic language. Structured text (ST) is a language standardized by IEC 61131-3, the international standard for writing logic programs. Users can write programs in text.

3.4.1 Relay symbolic language (ladder mode) The relay symbolic language is based on the concept of relay control circuits. This language allows programming through expressions similar to sequential circuits in relay control.

Ladder block A ladder block is the smallest elements for the sequence program operation, and starts at a vertical rail on the left side and ends at the one on the right side.

Sequence program operation method The sequence program is operated repeatedly from the ladder block at step 0 through the END instruction. A ladder block is operated from the left vertical rail to the right vertical rail and from top down.

Right hand side vertical bus

Ladder blocks

Left hand side vertical bus

Step number

*1 X0 to X5: Indicate inputs. Y10 to Y14: Indicate outputs.

Beginning of one ladder block

Operation from left to right

End of one ladder block

Operation from left to right Execution returns to step 0 when END instruction is executed.

*1 1) to 17) indicate the sequence of program operation.

1) 2) 7) 8) 9)

10)

3) 4) 5)

6)

11) 13) 14)

12)

15)

16)

17)

Operation from top to bottom

Operation from top to bottom

END

End of one ladder block

Beginning of one ladder block

973. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.4 Programming language

9

3.4.2 Function block (FB) A function block (FB) is a repeatedly used ladder blocks that is treated as a component so that it can also be used in other sequence programs.

Project A

Project A

Program 1 Program 1

Program 2

Program 2

Program 3

Program 3

Project B

Project B

Reuse FB

Repeatedly-used circuit blocks are treated as a block and treated as one component.

FB

FB

FB

8 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.4 Programming language

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

3.5 Operation processing method of the PLC function The PLC function uses the repetitive operation method of stored programs.

Stored program method The stored program method stores a sequence program to be operated in the internal memory in advance. At execution of the sequence program, the sequence program stored in the PLC function is read to the CPU by each

instruction in order to execute operations, and that result is used to control each device status.

Repetitive operation method The repetitive operation method executes a sequence of operations repeatedly. The PLC function executes the following process repeatedly.

The PLC function executes a sequence program stored in the internal memory in sequence from step 0. The PLC function performs internal processing such as updating timers/counters to the present values and performing self-

diagnostic checks after executing the END instruction, and returns to step 0 in the sequence program.

NOTE Processing from step 0 to the next step 0 or END to the next END is called a scan. Therefore, a single scan time is the

total time to process a user-created program (step 0 through END) and the time for internal processing of the PLC function.

Step 0 Step 1 Step 2

END

Timer/counter present value updating Self-diagnostic checks, etc.

Built-in sequence function repeats this operation.

993. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.5 Operation processing method of the PLC function

10

3.6 I/O processing method The control method is a refresh method.

3.6.1 Refresh method The refresh method stores changes in the control input terminals to the CPU input data memory in batch before every scan is executed and uses the data stored in this input data memory for operation execution. Program operation results of the output (Y) are output to the output data memory every time, and contents stored in the output data memory are output in batch from the control output terminals after the END instruction is executed.

Input refresh Input information is read 1) in batch from the PLC function area and stored in the input data memory (X) before executing step 0. Output refresh

Output information 2) stored in the output data memory (Y) is output in batch to the PLC function area before executing step 0. When executing a contact instruction for the input

Input information is read 3) from the input data memory (X) to execute a sequence program. When executing a contact instruction for the output

Output information is read 4) from the output data memory (Y) to execute a sequence program. When executing an OUT instruction for the output

Operation result of the sequence program 5) is stored in the output data memory (Y).

CPU (Central Processing Unit)

1)

2)

4)

5)Y20 Y22

X0

3) Input (X) data memory

Output (Y) data memory

Control input terminal

At input refresh

Control output terminal

At output refresh

PLC function area

0 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.6 I/O processing method

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

3.6.2 Response delay in refresh mode The following description is about the output delay for the varied inputs. As shown in the figures below, change in the output lags behind that in the input by up to two scans.

When Y1E turns ON at the earliest timing

The Y1E output turns ON at the earliest timing when the control input terminal turns ON immediately before the refresh. In this case, X5 turns ON at input refresh, Y1E turns ON at step 0, and then the control output terminal turns ON at output refresh after END instruction execution. Therefore, change in the control output terminal occurs one scan behind that in the control input terminal.

When Y1E turns ON at the latest timing

The Y1E output turns ON at the latest timing when the control input terminal turns ON immediately after the refresh. In this case, X5 turns ON at the next input refresh, Y1E turns ON at step 0, and then the control output terminal turns ON at the output refresh after END instruction execution. Therefore, change in the control output terminal occurs two scans behind that in the control input terminal.

Ladder example

In this ladder, output Y1E turns ON when input X5 turns ON.

OFF

OFF

OFF ON

ON

ON

OFF ON

Input refresh Input refresh Output refresh 0 END END0 56 0

Delay

(Minimum 1 scan)

Control output terminal

Y1E

X5

Control input terminal

OFF

OFF

OFF ON

ON

ON

OFF ON

Input refresh Input refresh Output refresh 0 END END0 56 0

Delay

(Maximum 2 scans)

Control output terminal

Y1E

X5

Control input terminal

1013. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.6 I/O processing method

10

3.7 Scan time Scan time Scan time is the time period from operation execution of a sequence program from step 0 until executing the next step 0. The scan time is not constant in every scan but differs according to whether instructions used are executed or not.

Scan time check The scan time from the END instruction to the next END instruction is measured inside the programmable controller and stored in special registers SD520 (SD521), SD524 (SD525), and SD526 (SD527).

Scan time accuracy The accuracy of the scan time observed inside the programmable controller is 2 ms. For example, the actual scan time is within the range of 3 ms to 7 ms when data stored in SD520 is 5.

Device number Name Description SD520 Current scan time The scan time is stored at every END and is constantly updated.

SD520: Stores the ms places (Stored range: 0 to 65535) SD521: Stores the s places (Stored range: 0 to 900)SD521

SD524 Minimum scan time The minimum scan time is stored at every END. SD524: Stores the ms places (Stored range: 0 to 65535) SD525: Stores the s places (Stored range: 0 to 900)SD525

SD526 Maximum scan time The maximum scan time is stored at every END. SD526: Stores the ms places (Stored range: 0 to 65535) SD527: Stores the s places (Stored range: 0 to 900)SD527

Scan time

END END0 0

Sequence program

END processing Timer/counter count processing Self-diagnostic checks

2 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.7 Scan time

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

3.8 Values that can be used in sequence programs For the PLC function, data such as values and alphabetical characters are represented in two statuses, 0 (OFF) and 1 (ON). Data represented with 0 and 1 is called BIN (binary). The PLC function can also use HEX (hexadecimal), which represents four bits of BIN data together. The following table shows the numeric representations in BIN (binary), HEX (hexadecimal), and DEC (decimal).

3.8.1 BIN (binary) Binary BIN represents a value with 0 (OFF) and 1 (ON). In decimal notation, when a value increases from 0 to 9, a carry occurs and the next value becomes 10. In BIN (binary) notation, a carry is generated after 0 and 1, and the next value becomes 10 (2 in decimal notation). Then, a next carry is generated after 10 and 11, and the next value becomes 100 (4 in decimal notation).

DEC (decimal) HEX (hexadecimal) BIN (binary) 0 1 2 3 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 47

0 1 2 3 9 A B C D E F 10 11 2F

0 1 10 11 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 10000 10001 101111

1033. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.8 Values that can be used in sequence programs

10

Numeric representation in BIN (binary) Each register (such as a data register) used for the PLC function consists of 16 bits.

Most significant bit is 0 ... Positive Most significant bit is 1 ... Negative

The following figure shows the numeric representation of each register used for the PLC function.

Numerical data that can be used for the PLC function In the numeric representation shown in the figure above, values can be represented in the range from -32768 to 32767. Therefore, each register used for the PLC function can store a value between -32768 and 32767.

3.8.2 HEX (hexadecimal) HEX HEX represents four bits of binary data with one digit. BIN uses 4 bits to represent the 16 values from 0 to 15. HEX uses the letter A to represent the bit next to 9 (10) and B to represent 11, and then a carry occurs after F (15). For the numeric representations of BIN, HEX, and DEC, refer to page 103.

Numeric representation in HEX Each register (such as a data register) used for the PLC function consists of 16 bits. Therefore, the value that can be stored in each register can be represented in the range from 0 to HFFFF in HEX.

Value is negative if most significant bit is 1.

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Most significant bit (for judgment of positive/negative)

2 14 2 13 2 12 2 11 2 10 2 9 2 8 2 7 2 6 2 5 2 4 2 3 22 21 202 15

16384 8192 4096 2048 1024 512 256 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1-32768

Bit name

Decimal value

4 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.8 Values that can be used in sequence programs

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

3.9 Explanation of devices

3.9.1 Device list The following list shows device names and ranges that can be used for the PLC function. Specifications in the following table may not be supported depending on the date of manufacture of the inverter. For details on applicable specifications, refer to page 8.

FR-A800, FR-A800 Plus and FR-F800 series

FR-E800 series

*1 P2048 to P2175 are used for automatic assignment. For details of automatic assignment, refer to GX Works2 Operating Manual (Simple Project).

Classification Category Device name Number of points

Range of use

Internal user device Bit device Input (X) 144 points X0 to X8F HEX Output (Y) 144 points Y0 to Y8F HEX Internal relay (M) 128 points M0 to M127 DEC Latch relay (L)

(Can be set with PLC function parameters but will not latch)

Bit device (contact/coil)

Word device (present value)

Timer (T) 16 points, 32 points

T0 to T15/T0 to T31 100 ms timer: 0.1 to 3276.7 s can be set 10 ms timer: 0.01 to 327.67 s can be set

DEC

Retentive timer (ST) 16 points, 32 points

ST0 to ST15/ST0 to ST31 100 ms retentive timer: 0.1 to 3276.7 s can be set 10 ms retentive timer: 0.01 to 327.67 s can be set

DEC

Counter (C) 16 points, 32 points

C0 to C15/C0 to C31 Normal counter: Setting range 1 to 32767 Interrupt program counter: Not used

DEC

Word device Data register (D) 256 points D0 to D255 DEC Internal system device

Bit device Special relay (SM) 2048 points

SM0 to SM2047 (with limited functions) DEC

Word device Special register (SD) 2048 points

SD0 to SD2047 (with limited functions) DEC

Classification Category Device name Number of points

Range of use

Internal user device Bit device Input (X) 144 points X0 to X8F HEX Output (Y) 144 points Y0 to Y8F HEX Internal relay (M) 128 points M0 to M127 DEC Latch relay (L)

(Can be set with PLC function parameters but will not latch)

Bit device (contact/coil)

Word device (present value)

Timer (T) 16 points T0 to T15 100 ms timer: 0.1 to 3276.7 s can be set 10 ms timer: 0.01 to 327.67 s can be set

DEC

Retentive timer (ST) 16 points 100 ms retentive timer: 0.1 to 3276.7 s can be set 10 ms retentive timer: 0.01 to 327.67 s can be set

DEC

Counter (C) 16 points C0 to C15 Normal counter: Setting range 1 to 32767 Interrupt program counter: Not used

DEC

Word device Data register (D) 256 points D0 to D255 DEC Pointer device Pointer (P) 256 points P0 to P127, P2048 to P2175 (All are common

pointers.)*1 DEC

Internal system device

Bit device Special relay (SM) 2048 points

SM0 to SM2047 (with limited functions) DEC

Word device Special register (SD) 2048 points

SD0 to SD2047 (with limited functions) DEC

1053. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.9 Explanation of devices

10

3.9.2 I/O X and Y The input and output are devices that are used for communication between the inverter and external devices. The input is given ON/OFF information externally to the control input terminals. Information is used as contacts (NO contact and NC contact) and source data of basic instructions in programs. On the other hand, the output is used to output program operation results from the control output terminals.

Input X The input allows external devices, such as push-button switches, selection switches, limit switches, and digital switches,

to give commands and data to the inverter (PLC function). Assuming that the PLC function has internal virtual relays (Xn), the NO contacts and NC contacts of those Xn are used in

programs.

There is no limit on the number of NO contacts and NC contacts of Xn used in a program.

When the inverter is used without connecting any external device to the control input terminal, "X" can be substituted for internal relay "M".

1

Pushbutton switch

Select switch

Digital switch

Inputs (X)

Sequence operation

Outputs (Y)

Signal lamp

Contactor

Inverter

LS2

PB1

X0

X1 X1

X0

Virtual relay

Sequence function

Input circuit (external devices) Program

No restrictions on the number of used contacts.

6 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.9 Explanation of devices

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Output Y The output performs output of program control results to external devices (signal lights, digital Human Machine Interfaces

(HMI), electromagnetic switches (such as contactors and solenoids)). Output information can be output through a single NO contact or an equivalent device. There is no limit on the number of NO contacts and NC contacts of output Yn used in a program as long as it is within the

range of the program capacity.

When the inverter is used without connecting the control input terminals to external devices, "Y" can be substituted for internal relay "M".

3.9.3 Internal relay M Internal relays are auxiliary relays that are used in the PLC function internally. These relays cannot latch (power failure retention). Performing any of the following turns all internal relays OFF.

When the power supply was turned ON When resetting

There is no limit on the number of contacts (NO contact and NC contact) to be used in a program. Use the output (Y) to output sequence program operation results.

M11

Load

No restrictions on the number of used contacts.Sequence function

Program Output circuit (external devices)

When X0 turns from OFF to ON, M0 (internal relay) is set (turned ON).

M0 may only be turned ON in sequence function and cannot be output to outside.

ON/OFF data of M0 is output to outside.

No restrictions on the number of used contacts.

1073. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.9 Explanation of devices

10

3.9.4 Timer T The PLC function uses up-timing timers. The up-timing timer starts measuring a present value when the timer's coil turns ON, and then the timer's contact turns ON when the present value reaches a setting value.

NOTE Sequence programs that use the devices T16 to T31 are available for applicable inverters that support 32-point devices.

(Refer to page 8) When such a program is written to the inverter that supports up to 16-point devices, an internal fault of the sequence program "INSTRCT.CODE ERR" will occur. In this case, the "P.RUN" indicator blinks on the operation panel display and the sequence program will not be executed.

100 ms timer and 10 ms timer The timer starts measuring a present value when the timer's coil turns ON, and then the present value returns to 0 and the timer's contact turns OFF when the coil turns OFF.

Ladder example

When input X5 turns ON, T2 coil turns ON and timer times 5s. (T2 is 100ms timer.)

Timing diagram

Setting

ON

5s

OFFT2 contact

Timer present value

T2 coil

X5 OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF ON

OFF

OFF OFF

ON

8 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.9 Explanation of devices

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

3.9.5 Retentive timer ST NOTE

Sequence programs that use the devices ST16 to ST31 are available for applicable inverters that support 32-point devices. (Refer to page 8) When such a program is written to the inverter that supports up to 16-point devices, an internal fault of the sequence program "INSTRCT.CODE ERR" will occur. In this case, the "P.RUN" indicator blinks on the operation panel display and the sequence program will not be executed.

100 ms retentive timer The 100 ms retentive timer is a timer that measures the time period during which its coil is ON. It starts measuring a present

value when its coil turns ON and retains the present value and its contact ON/OFF status even when the coil turns OFF. It resumes measurement from the retained present value when the coil turns ON again.

Use the RST ST instruction to clear the present value and turn OFF the contact. The retentive timer value is not kept and reset to zero after PLC power OFF.

3.9.6 Processing and accuracy of timers Processing When the OUT T instruction is executed, the ON/OFF switching of the timer coil, current value update, and ON/OFF switching of the contact are performed. In the END processing, the current timer value is not updated and the contact is not turned ON/ OFF.

Ladder example

Counts the X5 ON time period for 20s.

Resets ST5 contact and clears present value when X6 turns ON.

ST5

ST5

Timing diagram

15s

Setting

ON

5s

OFFST5 contact

Timer present value

ST5 coil

X5 OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF OFF

ON

1093. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.9 Explanation of devices

11

END OUT T0 END

[Program example]

[Processing at execution of OUT T0 instruction]

Processing

Coil ON/OFF Current value update

Contact ON/OFF

0 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.9 Explanation of devices

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Accuracy The value obtained by the END instruction is added to the current value when the OUT T instruction is executed. The current value is not updated while the timer coil is OFF even if the OUT T instruction is executed.

Accuracy of the timer response that is from reading input (X) to output the data are up to "2-scan time + timer limit setting".

X0 T0

K8

Timer limit setting=10ms, Setting value of T0=8 (10ms 8=80ms), Scan time=25ms

21 1 1 2 1 1 2 212

ON OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF ON

3 2 3 3

2 3 2 3 2 3

25ms 25ms 25ms 25ms 25ms 25ms

0+2=2 2+3=5 5+2=7 7+3=

Count at execution of the END instruction

10ms counting

Program

Current value of T0

External input to X0

Inverter X0

Coil of T0

Contact of T0

Scan time

END processing

END processing

END processing

END processing

END processing

END processing

Accuracy from when the coil of the timer turns ON until when the contact of the timer turns ON - (1 scan time + timer limit setting) to (1 scan time)

Timing when the coil of the timer turns ON

Input reading timing

1113. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.9 Explanation of devices

11

3.10 Counter C The PLC function uses up-timing counters. The up-timing counter turns its contact ON when the count value reaches a setting value.

NOTE Sequence programs that use the devices C16 to C31 are available for applicable inverters that support 32-point devices.

(Refer to page 8) When such a program is written to the inverter that supports up to 16-point devices, an internal fault of the sequence program "INSTRCT.CODE ERR" will occur. In this case, the "P.RUN" indicator blinks on the operation panel display and the sequence program will not be executed.

Count processing The counter's coil turns ON/OFF at execution of the OUT C instruction, and then the counter's present value is updated

and its contact turns ON after the END instruction is executed. The counter detects the coil's rise (OFFON) and then starts counting. Therefore, it will not start counting if the coil

remains ON.

Counter reset The count value is not cleared even when the coil turns OFF. Use the RST C instruction to clear the count value and turn

the contact OFF. If the counter is reset with the RST instruction, the counter's present value and contact are cleared at execution of the RST

instruction.

Ladder example

C0 counts on leading edge (OFF to ON) of input X5.

Resets C0 when input X6 turns ON.

Input condition

2 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.10 Counter C

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

3.10.1 Count process in refresh mode The counter counts at the rise of the counter's input conditions stored at input refresh.

NOTE For the maximum counting speed of the counter, refer to page 113.

3.10.2 Maximum counting speed of counter The maximum counting speed of the counter is determined by scan time, and counting is possible only when the ON/OFF time specified in the input conditions is longer than the scan time.

NOTE Duty n is a ratio between the ON and OFF time of count input signals and is represented as a percentage (%).

Ladder example

When OFF to ON of X5 is counted twice, C3 contact turns ON.

Counting method

Input (X) refresh

END END OUT C3

OUT C3 END

OUT C3 END

OUT C3 END

OUT C3 END

21

OFF

ON

OFF ON

OFF ON

OFF

0 ON

X5

X5 (Image)

C3 coil

C3 present value

C3 contact

Does not count since X5 remains ON.

Maximum counting speed Cmax = 100 n ts

1 [times/s] : Duty (%) : Scan time [s]

n ts

When T1 T2 n = T1 + T2

T1 100[%]

When T1>T2 n = T1 + T2

T2

Count input signal OFF

ON

T1 T2

100[%]

1133. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.10 Counter C

11

3.11 Data register D Data registers are memories that can store numerical data (from -32768 to 32767 or from H0000 to HFFFF) within the PLC

function. Each data register consists of 16 bits; therefore, data can be read and written in 16-bit increments.

Data stored during execution of a sequence program is retained until overwritten with new data. Unused timers (T) and counters (C) can be substituted for data registers if the number of data registers is insufficient.

b15 b0to

16 bits

D

Data register No.

4 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.11 Data register D

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

3.12 Special relays and special registers Special relays and special registers are internal relays and data registers, respectively, whose applications are already determined in the PLC function. The following are the main applications of special relays and special registers.

Sequence operation check The following special relays and special registers can be used for checking sequence program operations.

Operating status (RUN/STOP) check Error detection through self-diagnostic function Operation error detection Scan time check

Timing contact The following items are special relays with different operating statuses that can be used for sequence programs.

Always ON/OFF flag RUN flag (OFF for one scan) Initial processing flag (ON for one scan)

NOTE For special relays and special registers that can be used in the PLC function, refer to page 22.

Item Special relay number

Application/description

Diagnostic error SM0 Turned ON when a diagnostic error has been detected. ON status is retained even after the condition becomes normal.

Self-diagnostic error SM1 Turned ON when an error is detected by self-diagnosis. ON status is retained even after the condition becomes normal

Common error information SM5 When SM5 is turned ON, common error information (SD5 to SD15) is stored. Individual error information SM16 When SM16 is turned ON, error individual information (SD16 to SD26) is stored. Operation error flag SM56 Turned ON when an operation error is detected during instruction execution.

ON status is retained even after the condition becomes normal. Clock data read request SM213 Clock data is read in BCD value to SD210 to SD213 when this relay is turned ON. The

process is not executed when the relay is OFF. Always ON SM400 SM400 and SM401 are respectively turned ON and OFF regardless of the STOP and RUN

states.Always OFF SM401 ON only for one scan after RUN

SM402 SM402 and SM403 change depending on the STOP and RUN states. In the cases other than STOP: SM402 is ON only for one scan. SM403 is OFF only for one scan.

OFF only for one scan after RUN

SM403

1153. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.12 Special relays and special registers

11

3.13 Function list

NOTE The following functions cannot be used.

Constant scan, latch (retention at power failure), PAUSE, status latch, sampling trace, step operation, clock, interrupt processing, comment, microcomputer mode, print title entry, annunciator display mode, ERROR LED priority settings.

Function Description Remote RUN/STOP This function executes remote RUN/STOP from an external source when the SQ signal is ON (PLC function

RUN state (P.RUN is ON)). Watchdog timer variable (10 to 2000 ms)

This is a PLC function internal timer for detecting errors in the hardware or programs. Its setting value can be changed.

Self-diagnostic function This function diagnoses the presence of an error within the PLC function itself, and performs error detection, display and stoppage of the PLC function.

Output settings for STOPRUN

The output (Y) status when the state changes from the STOP state to the RUN state.

Keyword registration This setting prevents reading/writing of programs (parameter and main/sub programs) and comments.

6 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.13 Function list

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

3.14 RUN/STOP method of PLC function from an external source (remote RUN/STOP)

The PLC function RUN/STOP is executed by ON/OFF of the SQ signal. Remote RUN/STOP is performed by RUN/STOP of the PLC function from an external source when the SQ signal remains in the ON state (RUN state).

Application of remote RUN/STOP Remote RUN/STOP can be performed by remote control using remote RUN/STOP in the following types of cases.

When the inverter is out of reach When executing RUN/STOP for the inverter in an enclosure from an external source

Operation at remote RUN/STOP The operations of the sequence program that performs remote RUN/STOP are as follows.

Remote STOP: The sequence program is executed up to the END instruction, and enters the STOP state. Remote RUN: If remote RUN is executed when the inverter has been switched to the "STOP state" by remote STOP, the

state changes to RUN state again, and the sequence program is executed from step 0.

Remote RUN/STOP method The following methods can be used for remote RUN/STOP.

Setting using the PLC function parameters (by contact) Remote RUN/STOP can be executed by turning the remote RUN contact OFF/ON. For example, this can be used to STOP the PLC function at the emergency stop contact. (The state is "RUN" when the remote RUN contact is OFF, and "STOP" when the remote RUN contact is ON.)

PLC function parameter settings for the remote RUN contact X0 to X8F can be set for the remote RUN contact. (For details, refer to the Instruction Manual of FR Configurator2)

Remote RUN contact (External input terminal)

OFF ON

RUN STOP

Built-in sequence function: RUN/STOP status

Step 0 END Step 0 END 0

STOP status

SQ terminal

1173. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.14 RUN/STOP method of PLC function from an external source (remote RUN/STOP)

11

Using FR Configurator2 (Developer) RUN/STOP can be performed by operating remote RUN/STOP from FR Configurator2 (Developer). For example, this can be used to STOP the inverter in order to rewrite the sequence program when it is installed in an out of reach location.

Note Note the following points because the PLC function has priority on STOP.

The PLC function switches to the STOP state when remote STOP is executed from any source such as the remote RUN contact or FR Configurator2 (Developer), etc.

After switching the PLC function to the STOP state with remote STOP, all external factors (remote RUN contact, FR Configurator2 (Developer), etc.) that executed the remote STOP must be RUN in order to switch the PLC function back to the RUN state.

NOTE In the RUN state, the sequence program step 0 to the END instruction are executed repeatedly. In the STOP state, all

sequence program operations are stopped, and all outputs (Y) are OFF.

Remote STOP command OFF

ON

FR Configurator2 (Developer)

RUN/STOP status

Step 0 END Step 0 END 0

STOP status

ON

OFF

RUN

STOP

Remote RUN command

8 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.14 RUN/STOP method of PLC function from an external source (remote RUN/STOP)

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

3.15 Watchdog timer (watchdog error supervision timer)

Watchdog timer The watchdog timer is a PLC function internal timer for detecting errors in the hardware or sequence program. Use FR Configurator2 (Developer). Select the [PC parameter] window, [PC RAS setting] tab, and set the watchdog timer.

Watchdog timer reset The PLC function resets the watchdog timer before step 0 is executed (after the END processing is executed). When the PLC function operates normally and the END instruction is executed by the sequence program within the setting value, the watchdog timer does not output the signal. When a PLC function hardware failure occurs or if the END instruction of the scan time could not be executed well within the setting value, the watchdog timer outputs the signal.

Process when the watchdog timer reaches the setting value If the scan time exceeds the setting value of the watchdog timer, a watchdog timer error occurs and the PLC function is as follows.

All outputs of the PLC function turn OFF. The P.RUN LED blinks. SM1 turns ON, and an error code is stored in SD0. (Refer to page 46.)

PLC function parameter

Name Initial value Setting range Minimum setting increments

PLC RAS setting WDT (Watchdog timer) setting 200ms 10 to 2000 ms 10ms

Sequence program

END 00

Watchdog timer resetting (Internal processing)

Internal processing time

Excess of scan time over setting results in watchdog timer error.

1193. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.15 Watchdog timer (watchdog error supervision timer)

12

3.16 Self-diagnostic function The self-diagnostic function diagnoses the presence of an error within the PLC function itself.

Self-diagnostic timing The self-diagnostic is executed at power-on, at reset, when each instruction is executed and when the END instruction is executed.

At power-on, at reset. Diagnoses whether the operation can be executed.

When each instruction is executed An error occurs if the operation of each instruction of the sequence program could not be executed.

When the END instruction is executed Watchdog error supervision is performed.

Operation mode when an error is detected There are two types of PLC function operations for when an error is detected by self-diagnosis; the operation stops or operation continues. Even if the operation is set to continue, some errors can cause operation stop with the PLC function settings. (Refer to page 120.)

If an operation-stop error is detected by the self diagnosis, the operation is stopped as soon as the error is detected. (Note that other devices do not hold the status before an error occurs.)

If an operation-continued error is detected, the faulty program area is skipped, and the operation continues from the next step.

Confirmation of fault record When an operation error occurs, SM0 (self-diagnosis error) turns ON and an error code is stored in SD0 (self-diagnosis error). Particularly when the operation is set to be continued, use in the program and to prevent a malfunction in the machine system. For details on the fault record detected by self-diagnosis, refer to the error code list on page 224.

3.16.1 Operation mode when there is an operation error The PLC function can be set to either stop or continue operation of the sequence program when an operation error occurs. The setting of whether to stop or continue operation is set in the PLC function parameters.

The initial status of the operation mode and PLC function status when there is an operation error are as shown in the following table.

Error definition PLC function status P.RUN LED Operation Special relay

turned ON Special

register for data storage

Self- diagnostic

error number (SD0)

Initial status

Operation error

An error such as an attempting BCD conversion on a value that exceeds 0 to 9999 (or 0 to 99999999) occurred in the sequence program.

Continue SM0 SD0 50 ON

0 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.16 Self-diagnostic function

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

3.17 Registering file password This function sets write password and read password for each file stored in the inverter so that files are protected against tampering and theft by unauthorized persons. To set up a file password, select [Online] of FR Configurator2 (Developer), [Password/key word], and then [Registration/change].

File protection timing File protection is enabled immediately after the passwords are registered, and it is disabled immediately after the passwords are deleted.

Password target files A password can be set to the following files.

Program Device comment Initial device value Parameter Source information

Operations that are controlled and the number of characters A password can be set to the following operations. A password can be 4 to 32 alphanumeric characters (capital or lowercase letters).

Reading files Writing files Reading/writing files

Online operations that require password authentication Authentication is required to execute the following operations to password-protected files.

Write to PLC (data writing) Read from PLC (data reading) Online change (data writing) Change TC setting value (data writing) Verify with PLC (data reading) Create/Change or Delete of a password (data reading and writing) Delete PLC data (data writing)

Read password "XYZ98756" is authenticated.

FR Configurator2 (Developer)

FR Configurator2 (Developer)

File A can be read since the password matches.

Inverter

File A

Write password: AbcDEF12 Read password: XYZ98756

A write password and read password can be set individually.

File A cannot be written since

the password does not match.

Write password "1234abCD" is authenticated.

1213. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.17 Registering file password

12

NOTE For the procedure and precaution on the password change, cancellation, and unlock, refer to the GX Works2 Version1

Operating Manual (Common). Even when the password function (Pr.296, Pr.297) is enabled, FR Configurator2 can be used to read/write the inverter

parameter settings. The purpose of the file password is different from that of the inverter password function (Pr.296, Pr.297). If the password has been forgotten, clear the flash memory. However, doing so will also clear the PLC function programs

and the parameters for the PLC function. (Refer to page 71.)

2 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.17 Registering file password

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

3.18 Output (Y) status settings when STOP status RUN status

When changing from a state such as the RUN state to the STOP state, the RUN state output (Y) is stored in the PLC function. When changing from the STOP state to the RUN state, the PLC function parameter settings can be configured to either re- output the output (Y) or to output after operation execution.

"Output the output (Y) status before STOP" After outputting the output (Y) status directly before the STOP state, the sequence program operation is executed. "Clear the output (Y) (output after 1 scan)" After clearing all outputs (Y) and executing the sequence program operation, the output (Y) is output.

STOP status to RUN status

Is output (Y) status at STOP to be output?

YES

NO

Output (Y) status at the time of entering the STOP status is output.

Sequence program operation is executed.

Output (Y) status is cleared.

1233. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.18 Output (Y) status settings when STOP status RUN status

12

3.19 Structure of instructions Most of the instructions can be divided between the instruction section and device, and the applications are as follows.

The structure of instructions based on a combination of the instruction section and device can be broadly divided into the following categories.

Instructions that do not change the device status, and mainly perform program controls.

END

+ Controls device ON/OFF, controls the execution condition according to the device ON/OFF status, and performs program branching, etc.

+ + Performs operation on the destination data and source data, and stores the operation result in the destination.

Others Combinations other than those above.

Source (S) A source is the data used in the operation. It is as shown below depending on the specified device.

Constant Specifies the value used in the operation. It is a fixed value that cannot be changed when the program is being executed because it is set when the program is created.

Bit device, word device Specifies the device in which the data used in the operation is stored. Therefore, the data needs to be stored in the specified device before the operation is executed. The data used in the instruction can be changed by changing the data stored in the specified device while the program is being executed.

Instruction section Indicates the functions of the instruction. Device

Indicates the data used by the instruction.

Instruction section

Instruction section Device

LD X0 Device Instruction part

Instruction section Source device Destination device

MOV K100 D0 Destination device Source device Instruction part

4 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.19 Structure of instructions

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Destination (D) The data after operation is stored in the destination.

However, when instructions are constructed of a combination of + + , the data to be used in the operation needs to be stored in the destination before the operation. The device in which data is to be stored must be specified in the destination.

NOTE In this manual, the source and destination shall be indicated as the following abbreviations.

Source: , Source 1: , Source 2: , Destination: , Destination 1:

Instruction section Source device Destination device

S S1 S2 D D1

1253. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.19 Structure of instructions

12

3.20 Bit device processing method Processing methods available for when a bit device (X, Y, M) is specified are 1-bit processing, and 16-bit and 32-bit processing which are accompanied by digit specification.

3.20.1 1-bit processing When sequence instructions are used, the device that is the operation processing target is 1 bit (1 point) of the bit device, and multiple bits cannot be specified.

LD XO, OUT Y20

3.20.2 Digit specification processing When basic instructions or application instructions are used, there are situations in which the bit device that is the operation processing target needs to be specified with digit specification. When the processing increment of this digit specification is a 16-bit instruction, up to 16 points can be specified in 4-point increments.

16-bit instruction: K1 to 4 (4 to 16 points)

Setting range from 16-bit data digit specification of X0 to F

When there is a digit specification on the source (S) side, the values that can be handled as source data are indicated in the table below.

Specified number of digits 16-bit instruction K1 (4-point) 0 to 15 K2 (8-point) 0 to 255 K3 (12-point) 0 to 4095 K4 (16-point) -32768 to 32767

Ladder example Process 16-bit instruction

Designation range of K1

(8 points)

(12 points)

(16 points)

(4 points) Designation range of K2

Designation range of K3

Designation range of K4

Source (S) data

Change to 0.

6 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.20 Bit device processing method

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

When there is a digit specification on the destination (D) side, the number of points from the digit specification is applied to the destination side.

32-bit instruction: K1 to 8 (4 to 32 points)

Setting range X0 to 1F by 32-bit data digit specification

When there is a digit specification on the source (S) side, the values that can be handled as source data are indicated in the table below.

Ladder example Process When source (S) data is values

When source (S) data is a word device

Specified number of digits

32-bit instruction Specified number of digits

32-bit instruction

K1 (4-point) 0 to 15 K5 (20-point) 0 to 1048575 K2 (8-point) 0 to 255 K6 (24-point) 0 to 16777215 K3 (12-point) 0 to 4095 K7 (28-point) 0 to 268435455 K4 (16-point) 0 to 65535 K8 (32-point) -2147483648 to 2147483647

Ladder example Process 32-bit instruction

Destination (D) side

Remain unchanged.

Destination (D) side

Remain unchanged.

X1F X1CX1B X18 X17 X14X13 X10 XC XBXF X8 X7 X4 X3 X0

Specification range of K1

(4 points) Specification range of K2

(8 points) Specification range of K3

(12 points) Specification range of K4

(16 points) Specification range of K5

(20 points) Specification range of K6

(24 points) Specification range of K7

(28 points) Specification range of K8

(32 points)

Source (S) data

P K1 DMOV X000 D0

X010

D0

b3b4b15 b2 b1 b0

K1X0

Change to 0.

Change to 0.

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X3 X2 X1 X0

X3 X2 X1 X0

D1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

b31 b16

1273. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.20 Bit device processing method

12

When there is a digit specification on the destination (D) side, the number of points from the digit specification is applied to the destination side.

NOTE When 32-bit data is stored in word devices, it is stored in two consecutive word devices. An error does not occur even if

the stored data exceeds the range of the corresponding device, but the content of devices outside of the range is changed. When storing data, check beforehand that the amount of devices required for storage can be allocated.

Ladder example Process When source (S) data is values

When source (S) data is a word device

Destination (D) side

X010 P H K5 DMOV 78123456 M0

0

Remain unchanged.

0 0 1 0

M15 M8 M7 M0

M31 M20 M19 M16

3 6

7 2

H78123456

K5M0

0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0

0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0

0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0

4 5

8 1

Destination (D) side

X010 K5P DMOV D0 M10

Remain unchanged.

0 1 1 1

M25 M18 M17 M10

M41 M30 M29 M26

b15 b8 b7 b0

D1

b15 b8 b7 b0

D0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1

0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1

1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1

8 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.20 Bit device processing method

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

3.21 Handling of numerical values The PLC function has an instruction for handling values indicated in 16 bits and 32 bits. The most significant bit of the 16 bits and 32 bits is used to judge positive or negative. Therefore, the values that can be handled are as follows. 16-bit: -32768 to 32767 32-bit: -2147483648 to 2147483647

Value setting method 1) Decimal

2) Hexadecimal

Decimal and hexadecimal displays are supported as shown below.

10 is stored into D10 in BIN.

-10 is stored into D10 in BIN.

10 is stored into D10 in hexadecimal.

Decimal display

16 bits

32767

5

4

3

2

1

0

-1

-2

-3

-4

-5

-32768 H8000

H7FFF

Hexadecimal display

to

to to

H0005

H0004

H0003

H0002

H0001

H0000

HFFFF

HFFFE

HFFFD

HFFFC

HFFFB

to

Decimal display

32 bits

2147483647

5

4

3

2

1

0

-1

-2

-3

-4

-5

-2147483648 H80000000

H7FFFFFFF

Hexadecimal display

to

to to

H00000005

H00000004

H00000003

H00000002

H00000001

H00000000

HFFFFFFFF

HFFFFFFFE

HFFFFFFFD

HFFFFFFFC

HFFFFFFFB

to

1293. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.21 Handling of numerical values

13

3.22 Operation error An operation error occurs in the basic instruction in the following cases. When an error listed in the description of each instruction occurs.

Note that an operation error does not occur when the device specified range exceeds the corresponding device range, and data is written to devices other than the specified device.

Error processing If an operation error occurs when a basic instruction is executed, SM0 turns ON and an error code is stored in SD0. (SM0 remains ON even if subsequent processing is normal.)

The error code of the instruction in which the operation error occurred when SM0 changed from OFF to ON is stored in SD0. Therefore, the content of SD0 does not change when SM0 remains ON.

The following type of program resets SD0 and SM0.

When an operation error occurs, the choice of whether to stop or continue sequence processing can be made in the PLC function parameter settings. For details, refer to page 120.

M50 to M65 are the targets, but actual setting range is M0 to M63, and error occurs since M64 and M65 do not exist.

Reset command

Reset command Resets (turns OFF) SM0.

Resets SD0. (Clears SD0 to 0.)

RST SM0

RST SD0

0 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.22 Operation error

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

3.23 Sequence instructions list

3.23.1 How to view the instruction list table

1): Instructions are classified according to application. 2): Indicates the instruction symbol used in the program. Instruction symbols are based on 16-bit instructions.

Change the instruction symbols for 32-bit instructions as shown below. 32-bit instructions: Add a D to the start of the instruction.

Change the instruction symbol so that the start execution command is output when the signal is ON, as shown below. Add a P to the end of the instruction that is executed only at the leading edge of OFF to ON.

3): Indicates the symbol diagram on the ladder.

Destination: Indicates the destination of the data after operation. Source: Stores the data before operation.

Classification

Transfer (S)(D)

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)

5

Instruction symbol Symbol Process

description Execution condition

Number of steps

MOV

MOVP

DSMOV

DSMOVP

Example + D+

16-bit command 32-bit command

Example MOV MOVP

Instruction executed during ON Instruction executed only at the leading edge of OFF to ON

MOV S D

Indicates destination.

Indicates source. Indicates instruction symbol.

Indicates destination.

Indicates source. Indicates instruction symbol.

WAND S1 S2 D

1313. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.23 Sequence instructions list

13

4): Indicates the process description of each instruction.

5): Details of the execution conditions for each instruction are as follows.

6): Indicates the number of program steps required for each instruction.

3.23.2 Sequence instructions list

Symbol Execution condition Blank An always executed instruction. It is always executed irrespective of whether the instruction

prior condition is ON/OFF. When the prior condition is OFF, the instruction executes the OFF process. The instruction is executed only while the prior condition of the instruction is ON. When the prior condition is OFF, the instruction is not executed and is not processed.

The instruction is executed one time only at the leading edge of the prior condition (OFF to ON), and is not executed or processed even when any subsequent conditions are ON.

The instruction is executed only while the prior condition of the instruction is OFF. When the prior condition is ON, the instruction is not executed and is not processed.

The instruction is executed one time only at the trailing edge of the prior condition (ON to OFF), and is not executed or processed even when any subsequent conditions are OFF.

Classification Instruction symbol

Symbol Process description Execution Condition

Number of steps

Structur ed text*1

Refer to page

Contact Logical operation start (NO contact operation start)

1 141

Logical NOT operation start (NC contact operation start)

1

Logical AND (NO contact series connection)

1

Logical AND NOT (NC contact series connection)

1

Logical OR (NO contact parallel connection)

1

Logical OR NOT (NC contact parallel connection)

1

Link AND between logical blocks (Series connection between blocks)

1 143

OR between logical blocks (Parallel connection between blocks)

1

Stores operation results 1 145

Reads operation results stored in MPS

1

Reads and resets operation results stored in MPS

1

(D) + (S) (D)

Indicates 16 bits

(D + 1, D) + (S + 1, S) (D + 1, D)

16 bits 16 bits

Indicates 32 bits

+ 1D D

Upper 16 bits Lower 16 bits

LD

LDI

AND

ANI

OR

ORI

ANB

ORB

MPS MPS

MRD

MPP

MRD

MPP

2 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.23 Sequence instructions list

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

*1 Supported by the FR-E800 series only. For details, refer to MELSEC-Q/L Structured Programming Manual (Common Instruction).

Output Device output 1 148

1

1

1

1

1

Device set 1 150

Device reset 1(bit)/ 2(word)

Pulses of 1 program cycle are generated at the leading edge of input signal

2 152

Pulses of 1 program cycle are generated at the trailing edge of input signal

2

Shift Device 1-bit shift 2 154

2

Master control Master control start 2 156

Master control release 1

Program end Termination of main program 1 159

Always placed at the end of a sequence program to return to step 0.

1 159

Non-processing - Non-processing. For program erasure or spacing.

1 160

Non-processing. New line instruction for printer output.

1

Ignored (Subsequent programs will be controlled from step 0 of page n)

1

Classification Instruction symbol

Symbol Process description Execution Condition

Number of steps

Structur ed text*1

Refer to page

OUT

OUTT

OUTHT

OUTST

OUTHST

OUTC

SET SET D

RST RST D

PLS PLS D

PLF PLF D

SFT SFT D

SFTP SFTP D

MC MC Dn

MCR MCR n

FEND FEND

END END

NOP

NOPLF NOPLF

PAGE PAGE n

1333. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.23 Sequence instructions list

13

3.23.3 Basic instructions Classification Instruction

symbol Symbol Process description Execution

Condition Number of steps

Structur ed text*1

Refer to page

16-bit data comparison

When (S1) = (S2), conductive. When (S1) (S2), non- conductive.

3 164

3

3

When (S1) (S2), conductive. When (S1) = (S2), non- conductive.

3

3

3

When (S1) > (S2), conductive. When (S1) (S2), non- conductive.

3

3

3

When (S1) (S2), conductive. When (S1) > (S2), non- conductive.

3

3

3

When (S1) < (S2), conductive. When (S1) (S2), non- conductive.

3

3

3

When (S1) (S2), conductive. When (S1) < (S2), non- conductive.

3

3

3

LD= S1 S2=

AND= S1 S2=

OR= S1 S2=

LD<> S1 S2< >

AND<> S1 S2< >

OR<> S1 S2< >

LD> S1 S2>

AND> S1 S2>

OR> S1 S2>

LD<= S1 S2< =

AND<= S1 S2< =

OR<= S1 S2< =

LD< S1 S2<

AND< S1 S2<

OR< S1 S2<

LD>= S1 S2> =

AND>= S1 S2> =

OR>= S1 S2> =

4 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.23 Sequence instructions list

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

32-bit data comparison

When (S1+1, S1) = (S2+1, S2), conductive. When (S1+1, S1) (S2+1, S2), non-conductive.

3 180

3

3

When (S1+1, S1) (S2+1, S2), conductive. When (S1+1, S1) = (S2+1, S2), non-conductive.

3 180

3

3

When (S1+1, S1) > (S2+1, S2), conductive. When (S1+1, S1) (S2+1, S2), non-conductive.

3

3

3

When (S1+1, S1) (S2+1, S2), conductive. When (S1+1, S1) > (S2+1, S2), non-conductive.

3

3

3

When (S1+1, S1) < (S2+1, S2), conductive. When (S1+1, S1) (S2+1, S2), non-conductive.

3

3

3

When (S1+1, S1) (S2+1, S2), conductive. When (S1+1, S1) < (S2+1, S2), non-conductive.

3

3

3

BIN 16-bit addition/ subtraction

(S) + (D)(D) 3 167

3

(S1) + (S2)(D) 4

4

(S) - (D)(D) 3

3

(S1) - (S2)(D) 4

4

Classification Instruction symbol

Symbol Process description Execution Condition

Number of steps

Structur ed text*1

Refer to page

LDD= S1 S2LDD=

ANDD= S1 S2ANDD=

ORD= S1 S2ORD=

LDD<> S1 S2LDD<>

ANDD<> S1 S2ANDD<>

ORD<> S1 S2ORD<>

LDD> S1 S2LDD>

ANDD> S1 S2ANDD>

ORD> S1 S2ORD>

LDD<= S1 S2LDD<=

ANDD<= S1 S2ANDD<=

ORD<= S1 S2ORD<=

LDD< S1 S2LDD<

ANDD< S1 S2ANDD<

ORD< S1 S2ORD<

LDD>= S1 S2LDD>=

ANDD>= S1 S2ANDD>=

ORD>= S1 S2ORD>=

+ DS+

+P DS+P

+ + DS2S1

+P +P DS2S1

- DS-

-P DS-P

- - DS2S1

-P -P DS2S1

1353. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.23 Sequence instructions list

13

BIN 32-bit addition/ subtraction

(D+1, D) + (S+1, S) (D+1, D)

3 182

3

(S1+1, S1) + (S2+1, S2) (D+1, D)

4

4

(D+1, D) - (S+1, S) (D+1, D)

3

3

(S1+1, S1) - (S2+1, S2) (D+1, D)

4

4

BIN 16-bit multiplication/ division

(S1) (S2)(D+1, D) 3 170

3

(S1)/(S2)quotient(D), remainder (D+1)

4

4

BIN 32-bit multiplication/ division

(S1+1, S1) (S2+1, S2) (D+3, D+2, D+1, D)

4 185

4

(S1+1, S1)/(S2+1, S2) quotient (D+1, D), remainder (D+3, D+2)

4

4

BIN 16-bit data increment/ decrement

(D)+1(D) 2 173

2

(D) - 1(D) 2

2

BIN 32-bit data increment/ decrement

(D+1, D)+1(D+1, D) 2 188

2

(D+1, D) - 1(D+1, D) 2

2

16-bit transfer (S)(D) 2 174

2

32-bit transfer (S+1, S)(D+1, D) 2 189

2

Classification Instruction symbol

Symbol Process description Execution Condition

Number of steps

Structur ed text*1

Refer to page

D+ DSD+

D+P DSD+P

D+ D+ DS2S1

D+P D+P DS2S1

D- DSD-

D-P DSD-P

D- D- DS2S1

D-P D-P DS2S1

* * DS2S1

* P *P DS2S1

/ / DS2S1

/ P / P DS2S1

D * D* DS2S1

D * P D*P DS2S1

D/ D/ DS2S1

D/P D/P DS2S1

INC INC D

INCP INCP D

DEC DEC D

DECP DECP D

DINC DINC D

DINCP DINCP D

DDEC DDEC D

DDECP DDECP D

MOV DSMOV

MOVP DSMOVP

DMOV DSDMOV

DMOVP DSDMOVP

6 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.23 Sequence instructions list

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

*1 Supported by the FR-E800 series only. For details, refer to MELSEC-Q/L Structured Programming Manual (Common Instruction).

3.23.4 Application instructions

BIN 16-bit 2's complement

0 - (D)(D) 2 175

2

BIN 32-bit 2's complement

0 - (D+1, D)(D+1, D) 2 191

2

BIN 16-bit BCD conversions

3 177

3

BIN 32-bit BCD conversions

3 192

3

BIN 16-bit BIN conversions

3 178

3

BIN 32-bit BIN conversions

3 193

3

Jump *1 Jump to P when the input condition is satisfied

2 194

Jump to P from the next scan after the input condition is satisfied

2

Unconditional jump to P 2

Jump to END instruction when the input condition is satisfied

1

Classification Instruction symbol

Symbol Process description Execution Condition

Number of steps

Structur ed text*1

Refer to page

BIN 16-bit logical AND

(D) AND (S)(D) 3 197

3

(S1) AND (S2)(D) 4

4

BIN 32-bit logical AND

(D+1, D) AND (S+1, S) (D+1, D)

3 207

3

(S1+1, S1) AND (S2+1, S2) (D+1, D)

4

4

Classification Instruction symbol

Symbol Process description Execution Condition

Number of steps

Structur ed text*1

Refer to page

NEG DNEG

NEGP DNEGP

DNEG DDNEG

DNEGP DDNEGP

BCD DSBCD (S) (D)

BIN (0 to 9999)

BCD conversions

BCDP DSBCDP

DBCD DSDBCD (S+1, S) (D+1, D)

BIN (0 to 99999999)

BCD conversions

DBCDP DSDBCDP

BIN DSBIN (S) (D)

BCD (0 to 9999)

BIN conversions

BINP DSBINP

DBIN DSDBIN (S+1, S) (D+1, D)

BCD (0 to 99999999)

BIN conversions

DBINP DSDBINP

CJ PCJ

SCJ PSCJ

JMP PJMP

GOEND GOEND

WAND DSWAND

WANDP WANDP DS

WAND WAND DS2S1

WANDP WANDP DS2S1

DAND DSDAND

DANDP DANDP DS

DAND DAND DS2S1

DANDP DANDP DS2S1

1373. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.23 Sequence instructions list

13

*1 Supported by the FR-E800 series only. For details, refer to MELSEC-Q/L Structured Programming Manual (Common Instruction).

BIN 16-bit logical OR

(D) OR (S)(D) 3 200

3

(S1) OR (S2)(D) 4

4

BIN 32-bit logical OR

(D+1, D) OR (S+1, S) (D+1, D)

3 210

3

(S1+1, S1) OR (S2+1, S2) (D+1, D)

4

4

BIN 16-bit exclusive OR

(D) XOR (S)(D) 3 202

3

(S1) XOR (S2)(D) 4

4

BIN 32-bit exclusive OR

(D+1, D) XOR (S+1, S) (D+1, D)

3 213

3

(S1+1, S1) XOR (S2+1, S2) (D+1, D)

4

4

BIN 16-bit exclusive NOR

(D) XOR (S)(D) 3 204

3

(S1) XOR (S2)(D) 4

4

BIN 32-bit exclusive NOR

(D+1, D) XOR (S+1, S) (D+1, D)

3 215

3

(S1+1, S1) XOR (S2+1, S2) (D+1, D)

4

4

Classification Instruction symbol

Symbol Process description Execution Condition

Number of steps

Structur ed text*1

Refer to page

WOR DSWOR

WORP WORP DS

WOR WOR DS2S1

WORP WORP DS2S1

DOR DSDOR

DORP DORP DS

DOR DOR DS2S1

DORP DORP DS2S1

WXOR DSWXOR

WXORP DSWXORP

WXOR WXOR DS2S1

WXORP WXORP DS2S1

DXOR DSDXOR

DXORP DSDXORP

DXOR DXOR DS2S1

DXORP DXORP DS2S1

WXNR DSWXNR

WXNRP DSWXNRP

WXNR WXNR DS2S1

WXNRP WXNRP DS2S1

DXNR DSDXNR

DXNRP DSDXNRP

DXNR DXNR DS2S1

DXNRP DXNRP DS2S1

8 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.23 Sequence instructions list

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

3.23.5 Display instruction

*1 Supported by the FR-E800 series only. For details, refer to MELSEC-Q/L Structured Programming Manual (Common Instruction).

3.23.6 Control syntaxes Conditional statements and repeat statements are available for structured text (ST) programs to perform comparison and repetition. Refer to page 8 for availability of ST programs.

Conditional statement: When a certain condition is satisfied, the selected statement is executed. Repeat statement: One or more statements are executed repeatedly according to the state of a certain variable or

condition. The following table lists the control syntaxes.

For details on control statements, MELSEC-Q/L Programming Manual (Structured Text).

Classification Instruction symbol

Symbol Process description Execution Condition

Number of steps

Structur ed text*1

Refer to page

Character string data transfer

Character string specified with (S) is transferred to devices after that specified with (D).

3 217

3

Character string output

Data stored in the device specified with (S) is sent to PU. (n, (D) are dummies)

3 218

3

Data stored in the device specified with (S) is sent to PU.

2

Classification Control syntaxes Conditional statement IF statement

CASE statement Repeat statement FOR...DO syntax

WHILE...DO syntax REPEAT...UNTIL syntax

Other control syntaxes RETURN syntax EXIT syntax

$MOV DS$MOV

$MOVP DS$MOVP

G.PRR G.PRR DSn

GP.PRR GP.PRR DSn

UMSG SUMSG

1393. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.23 Sequence instructions list

14

3.24 How to view instructions The subsequent descriptions shall be in the following format.

Description 1) Indicates the item number, instruction overview and instruction symbol. 2) Devices that can be used by instructions are marked with . 3) When a bit device is used, this indicates digit specifications that can be set in the instruction required by the digit specification. 4) When an operation error occurs, instructions whose error flags turn ON are marked with . 5) Indicates the format in ladder mode. 6) Describes the instruction. 7) Indicates the execution conditions of the instruction. 8) Indicates the program example in ladder mode and list mode.

3.26.8 Data transfer instruction: 16-bit data transfer ... MOV, MOVP

Function

16-bit data from the device specified with is transferred to the device specified with .

Execution condition The execution conditions for transfer instructions are as follows.

Program example

Program that stores 155 as a binary value in D8 when X8 turns ON.

Applicable device Digit specification

Error flag Bit device Word (16-bit) device Constant Level

X Y M T C D K H N (SM0) MOV, MOVP

K1 to K4

S

D

Start number of the transfer source data or the device in which the data is stored

Setting data

S

Start number of transfer destination deviceD

MOV

MOVP

Transfer commands

MOV

S D

Before transfer

After transfer

16 bits

Transfer

MOV

MOVP

Transfer command

Executed every scan.

Executed every scan.

Executed only once. Executed only once.

MOV

Coding

1)

2)

5)

6)

7)

8)

3) 4)

0 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.24 How to view instructions

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

3.25 Sequence instructions Sequence instructions are used in relay control circuits, etc.

3.25.1 Contact instruction: operation start, series connection, parallel connection ... LD, LDI, AND, ANI, OR, ORI

Function ,

LD is the NO contact operation start instruction and LDI is the NC contact operation start instruction. When the bit of the word device is specified, these contacts turn on/off by 1/0 of the specified bit.

, AND is the NO contact series connection instruction, and ANI is the NC contact series connection. They import the ON/

OFF information of the specified device to perform the AND operation with the operation result up to this point and take the resulting value as the operation result.

There are no usage limitations on AND and ANI, but the following limitations exist in ladder mode. Write: When AND or ANI are connected in a series, a ladder with a maximum of 24 steps can be created. Read: When AND or ANI are connected in a series, a ladder with a maximum of 24 steps can be displayed. If the ladder exceeds 24 steps, steps up to the 24th step are displayed.

, OR is the parallel connection instruction with a single NO contact, and ORI is the parallel connection instruction with a

single NC contact. They import the ON/OFF information of the specified device to perform the OR operation with the operation result up to this point and take the resulting value as the operation result.

There are no usage limitations on OR and ORI, but the following limitations exist in ladder mode. Write: A ladder that contains 23 OR or ORI continually linked can be created. Read: A ladder that contains 23 OR or ORI continually linked can be displayed. Ladders that contains more than 23 OR or ORI cannot be displayed correctly.

Applicable device Digit specification

Error flag Bit device Word (16-bit) device Constant Level

X Y M T C D K H N (SM0)

Device numberX1

X1

X2

X2

X3

X3

LD

LDI

AND

ANI

OR

ORI

LD LDI

AND ANI

OR ORI

1413. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.25 Sequence instructions

14

Execution condition The instructions explained in this section are executed every scan irrespective of the device ON/OFF status or the operation result directly prior to the execution.

Program example , , , , , LD LDI AND ANI OR ORI

ORB

ANB

Coding

Coding

Coding

2 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.25 Sequence instructions

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

3.25.2 Association instruction: ladder block series connection, parallel connection ... ANB, ORB

Function

The AND operation is executed for the A block and B block to produce the operation result. The ANB symbol is a connection symbol, not a contact symbol. For programming in the list mode, ANB can write up to 15 instructions (16 blocks) in succession.

The OR operation is executed for the A block and B block to produce the operation result. ORB creates parallel connections with ladder blocks that have two or more contacts. Use OR or ORI to create parallel

connections with ladder blocks that only have one contact, there is no need to use ORB.

The ORB symbol is a connection symbol, not a contact symbol. For programming in the list mode, ORB can write up to 15 instructions (16 blocks) in succession.

Applicable device Digit specification

Error flag Bit device Word (16-bit) device Constant Level

X Y M T C D K H N (SM0)

Block A Block B

Use OR or ORI to connect a contact in parallel.

Block A

Block B

ANB

ORB

Coding

1433. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.25 Sequence instructions

14

Program example

The following two types of program coding are available for continuous series connection of ladder blocks. However, the coding example 1 should be applied.

The following two types of program coding are available for continuous parallel connection of ladder blocks. However, the coding example 1 should be applied.

ANB

Coding example 1 Coding example 2

ORB

Coding example 1 Coding example 2

4 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.25 Sequence instructions

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

3.25.3 Association instruction: operation results, push, read, pop ... MPS, MRD, MPP

Function

The operation result (ON/OFF) directly prior to the MPS instruction is stored. The MPS instruction can be used continuously up to 16 times. When the MPP instruction is used during the program, the

number of the MPS instructions to be used is reduced by 1.

The operation result stored by the MPS instruction is read, and the operation of the following step is continued by this operation result.

The operation result stored by the MPS instruction is read, and the operation of the following step is continued by this operation result.

The operation result stored by the MPS instruction is cleared. The number of MPS instructions to be used is reduced by 1.

Applicable device Digit specification

Error flag Bit device Word (16-bit) device Constant Level

X Y M T C D K H N (SM0)

MPS, MRD and MPP do not appear in ladder display.

MPS

MRD

MPP

1453. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.25 Sequence instructions

14

The ladder is as shown below when MPS, MRD and MPP are used and when they are not used.

Be sure to match the number of MPS and MPP instructions. The following will occur if the number used is different. If the number of MPS instructions is greater, the ladder is changed and the PLC function executes operations on the changed ladder.

Ladder when MPS, MRD and MPP are used Ladder when MPS, MRD and MPP are not used

Coding

Coding

When MPP is replaced by NOP

Before change

After change

6 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.25 Sequence instructions

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Program example , ,

Program using MPS, MRD and MPP

MPS MRD MPP

1) 1)

2)

2)

3)

3)

4)

4)

5)

5)

6)

6)

7)

7)

8)

8)

9)

9)

10)

10)

Coding

1473. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.25 Sequence instructions

14

3.25.4 Output instruction: bit device, timer, counter ... OUT

Function

Operation results up to the OUT instruction are output to the specified device.

NOTE The OUT instruction requires 3 steps when a special relay (M) is used.

Applicable device Digit specification

Error flag Bit device Word (16-bit) Constant Level

X Y M T C D K H N (SM0) Bit device

Timer Device

Setting value

Counter Device

Setting value

Operation result OUT instruction Coil Contact

NO contact NC contact OFF OFF Non-conduction Conduction ON ON Conduction Non-conduction

T0

T0

C0

C1

OUT Y15

Device number K50

Device number (T0 to 15)

D10

K50

Device number (C0 to 15)

OUT

OUT

Device number (T0 to 15)

Device number (C0 to 15)

(Y, M)

(T)

(C) D10

Setting Any of data register contents 1 to 32767 is valid

Setting Any of 1 to 32767 is valid

Setting Any of 1 to 32767 is valid

Setting Any of data register contents 1 to 32767 is valid

OUT (Y, M)

8 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.25 Sequence instructions

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

When the operation result up to the OUT instruction is ON, the timer coil turns ON and counts up the value up to the setting value. When the coil's timer reaches the setting value (counted value setting value), the contacts enter the following states:

When the operation result up to the OUT instruction changes from ON to OFF, the following occurs.

After the timer reaches the setting value, the state of the retentive timer contact does not change until the RST instruction is executed.

Negative values (-32768 to -1) cannot be set for the setting value. When the timer setting is specified with a word device, the range of the setting value is not checked. To avoid negative

values to be set, check the range of the setting value with a user program. When the setting value is "0", the timer times up at OUT T command execution. For details on the counting method of the timer, refer to page 109.

If the operation result changes from OFF to ON up to the OUT instruction, +1 is added to the present value (count value), and when counting reaches the setting value (present value = setting value), the contact is as follows.

The timer will not start counting if the operation result remains ON. (Count input does not need to be converted into pulse form.)

After a count-up, the count value and state of the contact do not change until the RST instruction is executed. Negative values (-32768 to -1) cannot be set for the setting value. Furthermore, if the setting value is 0, the same process

as for a setting value of 1 is performed. For details on the counting method of the counter, refer to page 112.

Execution condition The OUT instruction is executed for each scan irrespective of the operation result up to the instruction.

Program example

Program that outputs to the output module.

Program that turns X0 ON, and then 10 seconds later turns Y10 and Y14 ON.

NO contact Conduction NC contact Non-conduction

Type of timer Timer coil

Present value of timer

Before the time up After the time up NO contact NC contact NO contact NC contact

100 ms timer OFF 0 Non-conduction Conduction Non-conduction Conduction 10 ms timer 100 ms retentive timer

OFF Retention of present value

Non-conduction Conduction Conduction Non-conduction

NO contact Conduction NC contact Non-conduction

OUT (T)

OUT (C)

OUT

Coding

Coding

1493. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.25 Sequence instructions

15

3.25.5 Output instruction: device set, reset ... SET, RST

Function

When SET input is turned ON, the specified device turns ON. A device that was turned ON remains ON even if the SET input is turned OFF. It can be turned OFF with the RST

instruction.

When the SET input is OFF, the device state does not change.

When the RST input is turned ON, the specified device is as follows.

When the RST input is OFF, the device state does not change. The RST (D) function is identical to the following ladder.

Applicable device Digit specification

Error flag Bit device Word (16-bit) Constan

t Level

X Y M T C D K H N (SM0) SET

RST

Device Status Bit device (Y, M) The coil and contact are turned OFF. Timer, counter (T, C) The present value is set to 0, and the coil and contact are turned OFF. Word device other than timer and counter (D) The content is set to 0.

D

SET input

RST input Device number to resetRST Device number to set (ON)

Setting data SET

D

SET

SET input

RST input

RST

RST input RST input

Device number (D)

Device number (D)

0 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.25 Sequence instructions

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Execution condition The SET and RST instructions are executed for each scan.

NOTE The number of steps is three when the following devices are used.

SET instruction ... Special relay (M) RST instruction ... Special relay (M), all word devices

Program example ,

Program that sets Y8 (ON) when X8 turns ON, and resets Y8 (OFF) when X9 turns ON.

Program that sets the data register content to 0.

SET RST

Coding

Operations of SET and RST instructions

X8 (SET input)

X9 (RST input)

Stores X10 to 1F contents into D8 when X0 turns ON.

Resets D8 contents to 0 when X5 turns ON.

Coding

1513. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.25 Sequence instructions

15

3.25.6 Output instruction: rising, falling differential output ... PLS, PLF

Function

The specified device is turned ON when the PLS command changes from OFF to ON, and OFF at all times other than when the PLS command is turned OFF to ON (OFF to OFF, ON to ON, ON to OFF). If there is one PLS instruction for the

device specified by during one scan, the specified device is turned ON for one scan. Do not execute the PLS instruction of the same device multiple times during one scan.

After the PLS instruction is executed, it will not be executed again even if STOP is executed and RUN is executed again.

The specified device is turned ON when the PLF command changes from ON to OFF, and OFF at all times other than when the PLS command is turned ON to OFF (OFF to OFF, OFF to ON, ON to ON). If there is one PLF instruction for the device

specified by during one scan, the specified device is turned ON for one scan. Do not execute the PLF instruction of the same device multiple times during one scan.

After the PLF instruction is executed, it will not be executed again even if STOP is executed and RUN is executed again.

Applicable device Digit specification

Error flag Bit device Word (16-bit) device Constant Level

X Y M T C D K H N (SM0) D

PLS command

PLF command

Device number to convert into pulse form

Setting data

D

PLS

D

1 scan 1 scan

PLF

D

1 scan 1 scan

2 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.25 Sequence instructions

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Program example

Program that executes the PLS instruction when X9 is turned ON.

Program that executes the PLF instruction when X9 is turned OFF.

PLS

Coding

1 scan

PLF

Coding

1 scan

1533. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.25 Sequence instructions

15

3.25.7 Shift instruction: bit device shift ... SFT, SFTP

Function The ON/OFF status is shifted to the device immediately prior to the device specified with , and the prior device is set

to OFF. Use the SET instruction to turn ON the start device to be shifted. When SFT or SFTP are used continuously, start programming from larger device numbers.

Applicable device Digit specification

Error flag Bit device Word (16-bit) device Constant Level

X Y M T C D K H N (SM0) D

Device number to shift Setting data

D

SFT commands

D

X02 ON

After first shift input

After second shift input

X02 ON

After third shift input

After fourth shift input

After fifth shift input

1 At M8 to 15, 1 indicates ON and 0 indicates OFF.

Shift input

5)

6)

7)

Shift range

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)

7)

4 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.25 Sequence instructions

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Program example

Program that shifts Y7 to YB when X8 turns ON. SFT

Executes shifts when X8 turns ON. Program in order of larger to smaller device numbers.

Turns ON Y7 when X7 turns ON.

X8

X7

Y7

Y8

Y9

YA

YB

Coding

1553. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.25 Sequence instructions

15

3.25.8 Master control instruction: master control set, reset ... MC, MCR

Function This instruction is for creating an efficient ladder switching sequence program by opening and closing the common bus of

the ladder using the master control instruction. The following ladders use the master control.

When the MC ON/OFF instruction is turned ON at the start of master control, the operation results from MC to MCR are as per the instruction (ladder).

Even when the MC instruction is OFF, the scan time is not shortened because the scan is executed between the MC instruction and MCR instruction. Also, when the MC instruction is OFF, the operation results of MC and MCR are as follows.

The MC instruction can use the same nesting (N) number any number of times by changing the device.

When the MC instruction is ON, the coil of the device specified by is ON. Furthermore, as a double coil occurs when

the same device is used by instructions such as the OUT instruction, do not use a device specified by when it is executing a different instruction.

Applicable device Digit specification

Error flag Bit device Word (16-bit) device Constant Level

X Y M T C D K H N (SM0) n

Device Device status High-speed timer Low-speed timer

The count value becomes 0, and both coil and contact turn OFF.

High-speed retentive timer Low-speed retentive timer Counter

The coil turns OFF, but the count value and contact both retain the current state.

Device currently under OUT instruction All turn OFF. Device under SET, RST, SFT instruction Device under basic instruction, application instruction

Retain the current state.

D

Device number to be turned ON

Nesting (N0 to 14) Setting data

n

D

MC ON/OFF command

Nesting (N0 to 14)

Device

Y7

YF

Y10

Display in ladder mode of GPP

Executed only when X0 is ON.

Actual operation ladder

MC

D

D

D

6 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.25 Sequence instructions

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

The master control release instruction that indicates the end of the master control range. Do not add a contact instruction to the front of the MCR instruction. The MC and MCR instructions who have the same nesting number are used together. However, in a nesting structure

where the MCR instructions are at one position, every master control can be ended with the smallest nesting (N) number only.

Program example The master control instruction can be used as a nesting structure. Each master control area is separated by nesting (N).

N0 to N14 can be used for nesting. A ladder in which the program execution conditions are limited successively can be created by using the nesting structure. A ladder that uses a nesting structure is as follows.

MCR

A

B

C

H [ h \ Display in ladder mode Actual operation ladder

No affected by A, B and C.

Executed when A turns ON.

Executed when A and B turn ON.

Executed when A, B and C turn ON.

Executed when A and B turn ON.

Executed when A turns ON.

1573. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.25 Sequence instructions

15

Take note of the following points when using a nesting structure. A maximum of 15 nests (N0 to 14) can be used. When applying nesting, MC uses numbers from the lower nesting (N)

numbers upwards, whereas MCR uses numbers from the higher numbers downwards. If the order is reversed, the structure is not a nesting structure and the PLC function cannot operate normally.

If the nesting structure consists of MCR instructions collected in one location, the single lowest nesting (N) number can be used to terminate all master controls.

Since buses cross each other, normal master control ladder cannot be created.

A

B

Display in ladder mode

Nesting numbers of MCR are opposite.

Actual operation ladder

8 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.25 Sequence instructions

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

3.25.9 Termination instruction: termination of main program ... FEND

Function Execution of the FEND instruction will cause the CPU module to terminate the program it was executing. Even sequence programs following the FEND instruction can be displayed in ladder display at a peripheral device.

(Peripheral devices continue to display ladders until encountering the END instruction.)

3.25.10 Termination instruction: sequence program termination ... END

Function Indicates the end of a program. Scanning terminates with this step, and returns to step 0.

The END instruction cannot be used during the sequence program.

NOTE An operation error occurs if there is no END instruction during the program, and the PLC function does not operate.

Applicable device Digit specification

Error flag Bit device Word (16-bit) device Constant Level

X Y M T C D K H N (SM0)

Applicable device Digit specification

Error flag Bit device Word (16-bit)

device Constant Level

X Y M T C D K H N (SM0)

FEND

Sequence program

FEND

END

Sequence program

1593. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.25 Sequence instructions

16

3.25.11 Other instructions: non-processing ... NOP, NOPLF, PAGE n

Function

Non-processing instructions do not have an effect on previously executed operations. NOP are used in the following situations.

Creating space for sequence program debugging. Deleting instructions without changing the number of steps. (Replaced by NOP) Temporarily deleting instructions.

This is a no operation instruction that has no impact on any operations up to that point. The NOPLF instruction is used when printing from a peripheral device to force a page change at any desired location.

When printing ladders A page break will be inserted between ladder blocks with the presence of the NOPLF instruction. The ladder cannot be displayed correctly if an NOPLF instruction is inserted in the midst of a ladder block. Do not insert an NOPLF instruction in the midst of a ladder block.

When printing instruction lists The page will be changed after the printing of the NOPLF instruction. Refer to the Operating Manual for the peripheral device in use for details of printouts from peripheral devices.

This is a no operation instruction that has no impact on any operations up to that point. No processing is performed at peripheral devices with this instruction.

Applicable device Digit specification

Error flag Bit device Word (16-bit) device Constant Level

X Y M T C D K H N (SM0)

NOP does not appear in ladder display.

PAGE n

NOPLF

NOP

NOPLF

PAGE n

0 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.25 Sequence instructions

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Program example

Contact short-circuit (AND, ANI)

Contact short-circuit (LD, LDI) Caution is required because the ladder completely changes if LD or LDI are replaced by NOP.

NOP

Before change

Replaced by NOP.

After change

Coding

Coding

Replaced by LD T3.

Before change

Replaced by NOP.

After change

Coding

Before change

After change

Coding

Replaced by NOP.

NOPLF

Coding

1613. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.25 Sequence instructions

16

Printing the ladder will result in the following:

Printing an instruction list with the NOPLF instruction will result in the following:

6 Y30 X1

END8

0 X0

D30MOV K1

D40MOV K2

NOPLF5 NOPLF instruction, inserted as a delimiter of ladder blocks, causes print out page to be changed forcibly.

LD

MOV

0

1

X0

K1 D30

MOV

NOPLF

3

5

K2 D40

LD

OUT

END

6

7

8

X1

Y30

Changes print output page after printing NOPLF.

PAGE n

NOP

Coding

2 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.25 Sequence instructions

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

3.26 Basic instruction (16-bit) The basic instruction (16-bit) can handle 16 bits of numeric data.

3.26.1 Comparison operation instruction Comparison operation instructions execute size comparisons (=, >, < etc.) of two data, and instructs a contact to turn ON

when the conditions are met.

The usage method of comparison operation instructions is the same as the contact instructions of sequence instructions, and is as follows.

LD, LDI: LD= AND, ANI: AND= OR, ORI: OR=

There are 18 types of comparison operation instruction as shown below. For details, refer to page 164.

The conditions for turning comparison operation instructions ON are as follows.

NOTE The comparison instruction assumes the specified data as a BIN value for comparison. For this reason, when performing

hexadecimal comparison, when the value whose most significant bit (b15) is 1 (8 to F), the BIN value is assumed as a negative number for the comparison.

Comparison of HEX / 4-digit value

Therefore, -32767 < 1384, and Y10 does not turn ON.

Classification Instruction symbol

Classification Instruction symbol

Classification Instruction symbol

= LD= > LD> < LD< AND= AND> AND< OR= OR> OR<

LD<> LD<= LD>= AND<> AND<= AND>= OR<> OR<= OR>=

ONOFF OFFDn = K100

98 99 100 101 102

OFF ONDn K100

OFFONDn K100

OFFON ONDn K100

ON OFFDn K100

OFF ONDn K100

Regarded as -32767 in BIN.

Regarded as 1384 in BIN.

1633. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.26 Basic instruction (16-bit)

16

3.26.2 Comparison operation instruction: 16-bit data comparison ... =, <>, >, <=, <, >=

Function 16-bit comparison operation is handled as NO contact. Comparison operation results are as follows.

Execution condition The execution conditions for LD , AND and OR are as follows.

NOTE When the digit setting of a bit device is other than K4 and a start bit device value is other than a multiple of 8, the number

of steps is 7.

Applicable device Digit specification

Error flag Bit device Word (16-bit) device Constant Level

X Y M T C D K H N (SM0) K1 to K4

Instruction symbol

inside

Condition Comparison operation

results

Instruction symbol

inside

Condition Comparison operation

results = = Conducted = Not conducted

<> <> = > > > <= <= > < < < >= >= <

Instruction Execution condition

LD Each scan execution

AND Executed when the previous contact instruction is ON

OR Each scan execution

S1

S2

Instruction symbol inside

Start number of the comparison data or the device in which the comparison data is stored

=, <>, >, <=, <, >=

Setting data

S1

S2

S1 S2 S1 S2

S1 S2 S1 S2

S1 S2 S1 S2

S1 S2 S1 S2

S1 S2 S1 S2

S1 S2 S1 S2

4 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.26 Basic instruction (16-bit)

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Program example

Program that compares the X0 to F data with D3 data.

Program that compares the BCD value 100 with D3 data.

Program that compares the BIN value 100 with D3 data.

Program that compares the D0 with D3 data.

=

Coding

<>

Coding

>

Coding

<=

Coding

1653. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.26 Basic instruction (16-bit)

16

3.26.3 Arithmetic operation instruction An arithmetic operation instruction instructs the addition, subtraction, multiplication or division for two BIN data, or operation of increment or decrement.

BIN arithmetic operation (binary) If the operation result of an addition instruction exceeds 32767, the value is negative. If the operation result of a subtraction instruction is smaller than -32768, the value is positive. Operations of positive values and negative values are as follows.

5 + 8 13 5 - 8 -3 5 3 15 -5 3 -15 -5 (-3) 15 -5 3 -1 remainder -2 5 (-3) -1 remainder 2 -5 (-3) 1 remainder -2

6 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.26 Basic instruction (16-bit)

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

3.26.4 Arithmetic operation instruction: BIN 16-bit addition/ subtraction ... +, +P, -, -P

Applicable device Digit specification

Error flag Bit device Word (16-bit)

device Constant Level

X Y M T C D K H N (SM0) K1 to K4

S

D

S1

S2

D1

Instruction symbol inside

Start number of the addition/ subtraction data or the device in which the addition/subtraction data is stored

+, -

Setting data

S

Start number of the device in which the added/subtracted data is storedD

Start number of the added/ subtracted data or the device in which the added/subtracted data is stored

S1

Start number of the addition/ subtraction data or the device in which the addition/subtraction data is stored

S2

Start number of the device in which the addition/subtraction results are stored

D1

Addition/subtraction commands

Addition/subtraction commands

1673. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.26 Basic instruction (16-bit)

16

Function

Executes addition of the BIN data specified with and BIN data specified with , and stores the addition results in the

device specified with .

Executes addition of the BIN data specified with and BIN data specified with , and stores it in the device specified

with .

-32768 to 32767 (BIN 16-bit) can be specified in , , or .

Positive/negative judgment of the , , and data is performed by the most significant bit (b15). (0: positive, 1: negative)

The carry flag does not turn ON for the 0-bit underflow. The carry flag does not turn ON for the 15th bit overflow. (There is no carry flag)

Function

Executes subtraction of the BIN data specified with and BIN data specified with , and stores the subtraction results

in the device specified with .

Executes subtraction of the BIN data specified with and BIN data specified with , and stores it in the device specified

with .

-32768 to 32767 (BIN 16-bit) can be specified in , , or .

Positive/negative judgment of the , , and data is performed by the most significant bit (b15). (0: Positive, 1: negative)

The carry flag does not turn ON for the 0-bit underflow. The carry flag does not turn ON for the 15th bit overflow. (There is no carry flag)

+

D S

D

6912+

S1 S2

D1

6912+

S S1 S2 D

S S1 S2 D

-

D S

D

S1 S2

D1

S S1 S2 D

S S1 S2 D

8 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.26 Basic instruction (16-bit)

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Execution condition Addition/subtraction instruction

Program example Program that adds the content of D3 to the content of D0 when X5 turns ON, and outputs the results to Y38 to 3F.

Addition/subtraction command

Executed every scan.

Executed every scan.

Executed only once. Executed only once.

Coding

D0 D0

1693. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.26 Basic instruction (16-bit)

17

3.26.5 Arithmetic operation instruction: BIN 16-bit multiplication/division ... *, *P, /, /P

Applicable device Digit specification

Error flag Bit device Word (16-bit) device Constant Level

X Y M T C D K H N (SM0) K1 to K4

S1

S2

D

Instruction symbol inside

Start number of the multiplied/ divided data or the device in which the multiplied/divided data is stored

*, /

Setting data

S1

Start number of the multiplication/ division data or the device in which the multiplication/division data is stored

D Start number of the device in which the multiplication/division results are stored

S2

Multiplication/division commands

0 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.26 Basic instruction (16-bit)

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Function

Executes multiplication of the BIN data specified with and BIN data specified with , and stores the multiplication

results in the device specified with .

When is a bit device, specify from the lower bits.

K1: Lower 4 bits (b0 to 3) K4: Lower 16 bits (b0 to 15)

-32768 to 32767 (BIN 16-bit) can be specified in or .

Positive/negative judgment of the data is performed by the most significant bit (b15) for and , and (b31) for . (0: Positive, 1: negative)

Executes division of the BIN data specified with and BIN data specified with , and stores the division results in the

device specified with .

The division results are stored as the quotient and remainder using 32 bits for a word device, or stored as only the quotient using 16 bits for a bit device.

Quotient: Stored in the lower 16 bits. Remainder: Stored in the upper 16 bits. (Only stored for word devices.)

-32768 to 32767 (BIN 16-bit) can be specified in or .

Positive/negative judgment of the , , and +1 data is performed by the most significant bit (b15). (Both quotient and remainder have a sign.) (0: positive, 1: negative)

*

S1 S2

D

D

S1 S2

S1 S2 D

/

S1 S2

D

Quotient Remainder

S1 S2

S1 S2 D D

1713. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.26 Basic instruction (16-bit)

17

Execution condition The execution conditions for multiplication/division instructions are as follows.

Operation error An operation error occurs in the following cases, and the error flag turns ON.

When A1 or V are specified for .

When the divisor is 0.

Program example

Program that stores the multiplication results of BIN 5678 and 1234 in D3 and 4 when X5 turns ON.

Program that outputs the results of dividing the X8 to F data by 3.14 to Y30 to 3F when X3 turns ON.

Multiplication/division command

Executed every scan.

Executed every scan.

Executed only once. Executed only once.

D

S2

*

Coding

/

Coding

2 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.26 Basic instruction (16-bit)

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

3.26.6 Arithmetic operation instruction: BIN 16-bit data increment/decrement ... INC, INCP, DEC, DECP

Function

Adds 1 to the device designated by (16-bit data).

When INC/INCP operation is executed for the device designated by , whose content is 32767, the value -32768 is

stored at the device designated by .

Subtracts 1 from the device designated by (16-bit data).

When DEC/DECP operation is executed for the device designated by , whose content is -32768, the value 32767 is stored

at the device designated by .

Program Example The following is a down counter program.

Applicable device Digit specification

Error flag Bit device Word (16-bit) device Constant Level

X Y M T C D K H N (SM0) INC, INCP, DEC, DECP

K1 to K4 D

Instruction symbol inside

Start number of devices for INC (+1)/DEC (-1) operation (BIN 16 bits)

INC, DEC

Setting data

D

Command

Command P

D

D

INC

D

5679 (BIN) b0

5678 (BIN) b15

D

b0b15

D

D

D

DEC

D

1 5677 (BIN) b0

5678 (BIN) b15

D

b0b15

D

D

Transfers 100 to D8 when X7 goes ON. Coding

In the state M38=OFF, decrement at D8 (D8 - 1) is executed when X8 goes from OFF to ON. At D8=0, M38 goes ON.

1733. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.26 Basic instruction (16-bit)

17

3.26.7 Data transfer instruction The data transfer instruction is an instruction that executes the transfer of data. Data transferred by the data transfer instruction is retained until new data is transferred.

3.26.8 Data transfer instruction: 16-bit data transfer ... MOV, MOVP

Function

16-bit data from the device specified with is transferred to the device specified with .

Execution condition The execution conditions for transfer instructions are as follows.

Program example

Program that stores 155 as a binary value in D8 when X8 turns ON.

Applicable device Digit specification

Error flag Bit device Word (16-bit) device Constant Level

X Y M T C D K H N (SM0) MOV, MOVP

K1 to K4

S

D

Start number of the transfer source data or the device in which the data is stored

Setting data

S

Start number of transfer destination deviceD

MOV

MOVP

Transfer commands

MOV

S D

Before transfer

After transfer

16 bits

Transfer

MOV

MOVP

Transfer command

Executed every scan.

Executed every scan.

Executed only once. Executed only once.

MOV

Coding

4 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.26 Basic instruction (16-bit)

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

3.26.9 Data conversion instruction: 2s complements of BIN 16- bit data ... NEG, NEGP

Function Invert the sign of the 16-bit device specified with , and store the device specified with .

This is used when inverting the positive/negative signs.

Execution condition

Applicable device Digit specification

Error flag Bit device Word (16-bit) device Constant Level

X Y M T C D K H N (SM0) NEG K1 to K4 D

Start number of the device in which the data that executes two's complement is stored

Setting data

D

2's complement execution commands

NEG

NEGP

D D

Before execution

Sign conversion

After execution

16 bits

NEG

NEGP

2's complement execution command

Executed every scan.

Executed only once.Executed only once.

Executed every scan.

1753. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.26 Basic instruction (16-bit)

17

Program example

Program that calculates D10 to D20 when XA is turned ON, and calculates the absolute value when this result is negative. NEG

ON.

ON,

6 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.26 Basic instruction (16-bit)

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

3.26.10 Data conversion instructions: BIN 16-bit data BCD conversions ... BCD, BCDP

Function

Converts BIN data (0 to 9999) at the device designated by to BCD data, and stores it at the device designated by .

Applicable device Digit specification

Error flag Bit device Word (16-bit) device Constant Level

X Y M T C D K H N (SM0) BCD BCDP

K1 to K4

S

D

BIN data or start number of the devices where the BIN data is stored (BIN 16 bits)

Setting data

S

Start number of the devices where BCD data will be stored (BCD 4 digits)DBCDP

BCD Command

Command

S D

S D

BCD

S D

-32768 0

16384 0

8192 1

4096 0

2048 0

1024 1

512 1

256 1

128 0

64 0

32 0

16 0

8 1

4 1

2 1

1 1BIN 9999

8000 1

4000 0

2000 0

1000 1

800 1

400 0

200 0

100 1

80 1

40 0

20 0

10 1

8 1

4 0

2 0

1 1BCD 9999

BCD conversion

Thousands digits Hundreds digits Tens digits Ones digits

Must always be "0".

S

D

1773. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.26 Basic instruction (16-bit)

17

3.26.11 Data conversion instructions: BIN 16-bit data BIN conversions ... BIN, BINP

Function

Converts BCD data (0 to 9999) at device designated by to BIN data, and stores at the device designated by .

Applicable device Digit specification

Error flag Bit device Word (16-bit) device Constant Level

X Y M T C D K H N (SM0) BIN BINP

K1 to K4

S

D

BCD data or start number of the devices where the BCD data is stored (BCD 4 digits)

Setting data

S

Start number of the devices where BIN data will be stored (BIN 16 bits)D

BINP

BIN Command

Command

S D

S D

BIN

S D

BIN conversion

8000

1 4000

0 2000

0 1000

1 800

1 400

0 200

0 100

1 80

1 40

0 20

0 10

1 8

1 4

0 2

0 1

1BCD 9999

Thousands digits Hundreds digits Tens digits Ones digits

32768

0 16384

0 8192

1 4096

0 2048

0 1024

1 512

1 256

1 128

0 64

0 32

0 16

0 8

1 4

1 2

1 1

1BIN 9999

Always filled with 0s.

S

D

8 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.26 Basic instruction (16-bit)

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

3.27 Basic instruction (32-bit) The basic instruction (32-bit) is an instruction that can handle numeric data that is expressed in 32 bits.

3.27.1 Comparison operation instruction Comparison operation instructions execute size comparisons (D=, D>, D< etc.) of two data, and instructs the contact to

turn ON when the conditions are met.

The usage method of comparison operation instructions is the same as the contact instructions of sequence instructions, and is as follows.

LD, LDI.......LDD= AND, ANI...ANDD= OR, ORI.....ORD=

There are 18 types of comparison operation instruction as shown below. For details, refer to page 180.

The conditions for turning comparison operation instructions ON are as follows.

NOTE The comparison instruction assumes the specified data as a BIN value for comparison. For this reason, when performing

hexadecimal comparison, when the value whose most significant bit (b31) is 1 (8 to F), the BIN value is assumed as a negative number for the comparison.

Comparison of HEX/8 digit value

Therefore, -2147483648 < -2147483647, and Y10 does not turn ON.

Classification Instruction symbol

Classification Instruction symbol

Classification Instruction symbol

= LDD= > LDD> < LDD< ANDD= ANDD> ANDD< ORD= ORD> ORD<

LDD<> LDD<= LDD>= ANDD<> ANDD<= ANDD>= ORD<> ORD<= ORD>=

ONOFF OFFDn = K100

98 99 100 101 102

OFF ONDn K100

OFFONDn K100

OFFON ONDn K100

ON OFFDn K100

OFF ONDn K100

Regarded as -2147483648 in BIN.

Regarded as 2147483647 in BIN.

D> H8000 H0000 H7FFF HFFFF Y10

1793. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.27 Basic instruction (32-bit)

18

3.27.2 Comparison operation instruction: 32-bit data comparison ... D=, D<>, D>, D<=, D<, D>=

Function 32-bit comparison operation handled as NO contact. Comparison operation results are as follows.

Execution condition The execution conditions for LD , AND and OR are as follows.

NOTE When the digit setting of a bit device is other than K8 and a start bit device value is other than a multiple of 8, the number

of steps is 7.

Applicable device Digit specification

Error flag Bit device Word (16-bit) device Constant Level

X Y M T C D K H N (SM0) K1 to K8

Instruction symbol inside

Condition Comparison operation

results

Instruction symbol inside

Condition Comparison operation

results D= = Conducted D= Not conducted

D<> D<> = D> > D> D<= D<= > D< < D< D>= D>= <

Instruction Execution condition

LD Each scan execution

AND Executed when the previous contact instruction turns ON.

OR Each scan execution

S1

S2

Instruction symbol inside

Start number of the comparison data or the device in which the data is stored

D=, D<>, D>, D<=, D<, D>=

Setting data

S1

S2

S1 S2 S1 S2

S1 S2 S1 S2

S1 S2 S1 S2

S1 S2 S1 S2

S1 S2 S1 S2

S1 S2 S1 S2

0 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.27 Basic instruction (32-bit)

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Program example

Program that compares the M0 to 31 data with D3 and D4 data.

Program that compares the BCD value 18000 with D3 and D4 data.

Program that compares the BIN value -80000 with D3 and D4 data.

Program that compares D0 and D1 with D3 and D4 data.

D=

( )0 K8

D= M0 D3 Y0

Coding LDD= K8M0 D3

11 OUT Y0 12 END

0

D<>

( )0 H

D<> 00018000 D3 Y0 M3

ANDD<> H00018000 D3 12 OUT Y0 13 END

M3 1 0 LD Coding

D>

( )0 K-

D> 80000 D3 Y0 M3

LDD> K-80000 D3 12 OR M8 13 ANB 14 OUT Y0 15 END

M3

M8

1 0 LD Coding

D<=

( )0

D<= D0 D3

Y0 M3 M8

ORD<= D0 D3 13 OUT Y0 14 END

M3 M8

2 AND1 LD0

Coding

1813. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.27 Basic instruction (32-bit)

18

3.27.3 Arithmetic operation instruction An arithmetic operation instruction instructs the addition, subtraction, multiplication or division for two BIN data, or operation of increment or decrement.

BIN arithmetic operation (binary) If the operation result of an addition instruction exceeds 2147483647, the value is negative. If the operation result of a subtraction instruction is smaller than -2147483648, the value is positive. Operations of positive values and negative values are as follows.

5 + 8 13 5 - 8 -3 5 3 15 -5 3 -15 -5 (-3) 15 -5 3 -1 remainder -2 5 (-3) -1 remainder 2 -5 (-3) 1 remainder -2

3.27.4 Arithmetic operation instruction: BIN 32-bit addition/ subtraction ... D+, D+P, D-, D-P

Applicable device Digit specification

Error flag Bit device Word (16-bit) device Constant Level

X Y M T C D K H N (SM0) K1 to K8

S

D

S1

S2

D1

Instruction symbol inside

Start number of the addition/ subtraction data or the device in which the addition/subtraction data is stored

D+, D-

Setting data

S

Start number of the device in which the added/subtracted data is storedD

Start number of the added/subtracted data or the device in which the added/ subtracted data is storedS1

Start number of the addition/ subtraction data or the device in which the addition/subtraction data is stored

S2

Start number of the device in which the addition/subtraction results are stored

D1

Addition/subtraction commands

Addition/subtraction commands

2 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.27 Basic instruction (32-bit)

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Function

Executes addition of the BIN data specified with and BIN data specified with , and stores the addition results in the

device specified with .

Executes addition of the BIN data specified with and BIN data specified with , and stores the addition results in the

device specified with .

-2147483648 to 2147483647 (BIN 32-bit) can be specified in , , or .

Positive/negative judgment of the , , and data is performed by the most significant bit (b31). (0: positive, 1:

negative) The carry flag does not turn ON for the 0-bit underflow. The carry flag does not turn ON for the 31st bit overflow. (There is

no carry flag.)

Function

Executes subtraction of the BIN data specified with and BIN data specified with , and stores the subtraction results

in the device specified with .

Executes subtraction of the BIN data specified with and BIN data specified with , and stores the subtraction results

in the device specified with .

-2147483648 to 2147483647 (BIN 32-bit) can be specified in , , or .

Positive/negative judgment of the , , and data is performed by the most significant bit (b31). (0: positive, 1: negative)

The carry flag does not turn ON for the 0-bit underflow. The carry flag does not turn ON for the 31st bit overflow. (There is no carry flag)

D+

D S

D

+

+1

123456 (BIN) b0b16 b15

+1

567890 (BIN) b31

691346 (BIN)

DD S S +1 DD

b0b16 b15b31 b0b16 b15b31

S1 S2

D1

+

+1

123456 (BIN) b0b16 b15

+1

567890 (BIN) b31

+1

691346 (BIN)

D1

b0b16 b15b31 b0b16 b15b31

S1 S1 S2 S2 D1

S S1 S2 D

S S1 S2 D

D-

D S

D

+1

123456 (BIN) b0b16 b15

567890 (BIN) b31

444434 (BIN)

D S+1 D S D +1 D

b0b16 b15b31 b0b16 b15b31 -

S1 S2

D1

123456 (BIN) b0b16 b15

+1

567890 (BIN) b31

+1

444434 (BIN)

+1S1 S2 D1S1 S2

b0b16 b15b31 b0b16 b15b31 -

D1

S S1 S2 D

S S1 S2 D

1833. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.27 Basic instruction (32-bit)

18

Execution condition Addition/subtraction instruction

Program example

Program that adds the X10 to X2B 28-bit data to the D9 and D10 data when X0 turns ON, and outputs the results to M0 to M27.

Program that subtracts the M0 to M23 data from the D0 and D1 data when X0 turns ON, and stores the results in D10 and D11.

Addition/subtraction command

Executed every scan.

Executed every scan.

Executed only once. Executed only once.

D+

Coding

D+P K7X010 D9 K7M0 12 END

0 X000 K7

D+ X010 D9 M0 X000

1

P K7 0 LD

D-

Coding X0

D-P D0 K6M0 D10 12 END

0 X0 K6

D- D0 M0 D10 P LD0

1

4 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.27 Basic instruction (32-bit)

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

3.27.5 Arithmetic operation instruction: BIN 32-bit multiplication/division ... D*, D*P, D/, D/P

Function

Executes multiplication of the BIN data specified with and BIN data specified with , and stores the results in the

device specified with

When is a bit device, specify from the lower bits.

K1: Lower 4 bits (b0 to 3) K4: Lower 16 bits (b0 to 15) K8: Lower 32 bits (b0 to 31)

-2147483648 to 2147483647 (BIN 32-bit) can be specified in or .

Positive/negative judgment of the data is performed by the most significant bit (b31) for and , and (b63) for . (0: positive, 1: negative)

Applicable device Digit specification

Error flag Bit device Word (16-bit) device Constant Level

X Y M T C D K H N (SM0) K1 to K8

S1

S2

D

Instruction symbol inside

Start number of the multiplied/divided data or the device in which the multiplied/divided data is stored

D*, D/

Setting data

S1

Start number of the multiplication/division data or the device in which the multiplication/ division data is stored

D Start number of the device in which the multiplication/division results are stored

S2

Multiplication/division commands

D *

S1 S2

D

*

+1

123456 (BIN) b0b63 b48 b31 b16

+1+2

70109427840 (BIN)

+3

b0b16 b15

+1

567890 (BIN) b31

S1 S2 DS1

b0b16 b15b31 b47 b32 b15

S2 D D D

D

S1 S2

S1 S2 D

1853. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.27 Basic instruction (32-bit)

18

Executes division of the BIN data specified with and BIN data specified with , and stores the results in the device

specified with .

The division results are stored as the quotient and remainder using 64 bits for a word device, or stored as only the quotient using 32 bits for a bit device.

Quotient: Stored in the lower 32 bits. Remainder: Stored in the upper 32 bits. (Only stored for word devices.)

-2147483648 to 2147483647 (BIN 32-bit) can be specified in or .

Positive/negative judgment of the , , and +2 data is performed by the most significant bit (b31). (Both quotient and remainder have a sign.) (0: positive, 1: negative)

Execution condition The execution conditions for multiplication/division instructions are as follows.

D/

S1 S2

D

/

+1

123456 (BIN) b0b15

+1

567890 (BIN) b31

+1

4 (BIN) 74066 (BIN)

+2+3S1 S2 D D D D

b16

S1

b0b15b31 b16

S2

b0b15b31 b16 b0b15b31 b16

Quotient Remainder

S1 S2

S1 S2 D D

Multiplication/division command

Executed every scan.

Executed every scan.

Executed only once. Executed only once.

6 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.27 Basic instruction (32-bit)

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Operation error An operation error occurs in the following cases, and the error flag turns ON.

When A1 or V is specified in or , or A0, A1, Z or V are specified in .

When the divisor is 0.

Program example

Program that stores the results of multiplying D7 and D8 BIN data with D18 and D19 BIN data in D1 to D4 when X5 turns ON.

Program that outputs the result of multiplying M0 to 7 by 3.14 to D3 when X3 turns ON.

S1 S2 D

S2

D *

X005 D* D7 0

P Coding 0 X005

D7 D18 D1 12 END

D18 D1

D*P1 LD

D/

Coding 0 LD X003 1 *P K2M0 K314 D0 8 D/P D0 K100 D2

19 MOVP D2 D3 24 ENDMOV D2 D3

314

D/ D0 100 D2

P K2 K

P

P

0 X003

K

D0M0*

1873. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.27 Basic instruction (32-bit)

18

3.27.6 Arithmetic operation instruction: BIN 32-bit data increment/decrement ... DINC, DINCP, DDEC, DDECP

Function

Adds 1 to the device designated by (32-bit data).

When DINC/DINCP operation is executed for the device designated by , whose content is 2147483647, the value -

2147483648 is stored at the device designated by .

Subtracts -1 from the device designated by (32-bit data).

When DDEC/DDECP operation is executed for the device designated by , whose content is 0, the value -1 is stored at

the device designated by .

Program example The following program adds 1 to the data at D0 and D1 when X0 is ON.

The following program subtracts 1 from the data at D0 and D1 when X0 goes ON.

Applicable device Digit specification

Error flag Bit device Word (16-bit) device Constant Level

X Y M T C D K H N (SM0) DINC, DINCP, DDEC, DDECP

K1 to K8 D

Instruction symbol inside

Start number of devices for DINC(+1) or DDEC(-1) operation (BIN 32 bits)

DINC, DDEC

Setting data

D

Command

Command P

D

D

DINC

D

b0b16 b15

+1

73500 (BIN) b31

73501 (BIN)

D D +1D D

b0b16 b15b31

D

D

DDEC

D

b0b16 b15

+1

73500 (BIN) b31

73499 (BIN) 1

D D +1D D

b0b16 b15b31

D

D

Coding

Coding

8 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.27 Basic instruction (32-bit)

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

3.27.7 Data transfer instruction The data transfer instruction is an instruction that executes the transfer of data. Data transferred by the data transfer instruction is retained until new data is transferred.

3.27.8 Data transfer instruction: 32-bit data transfer ... DMOV, DMOVP

Function

32-bit data from the device specified with is transferred to the device specified with .

Execution condition The execution conditions for transfer instructions are as follows.

Applicable device Digit specification

Error flag Bit device Word (16-bit) device Constant Level

X Y M T C D K H N (SM0) DMOV, DMOVP

K1 to K8

S

D

Start number of the transfer source data or the device in which the data is stored

Setting data

S

Start number of transfer destination deviceD

DMOV

DMOVP

Transfer commands

DMOV

S D

After transfer

Before transfer

32 bits

Transfer

D

S

DMOV

DMOVP

Transfer command

Executed every scan.

Executed every scan.

Executed only once. Executed only once.

1893. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.27 Basic instruction (32-bit)

19

Program example

Program that stores the input D2 to D3 data in D0 and D1.

Program that stores M0 to M31 data in D0 and D1.

DMOV

Coding M32

DMOVP D2 D00 DMOV D2 D0 PM32 0 L

1 8 END

0 K8M32

K8M0 D0

Coding DMOV M0 D0 0

1 8

LD DMOVP END

M32

0 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.27 Basic instruction (32-bit)

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

3.27.9 Data conversion instruction: 2's complements of BIN 32- bit data ... DNEG, DNEGP

Function Invert the sign of the 32-bit device specified with , and store the device specified with .

This is used when inverting the positive/negative signs.

Execution condition

Applicable device Digit specification

Error flag Bit device Word (16-bit) device Constant Level

X Y M T C D K H N (SM0) DNEG(P) K1 to K8 D

Start number of the device in which the data that executes two's complement is stored

Setting data

D

2's complement execution commands

DNEG

DNEGP

D D

32 bit b31 1

Before execution 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0

b0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0

1

b31 0 0 0 1 1 1 0

b0

Sign conversion -

After execution 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

D

D

-218460

218460

DNEG

DNEGP

2's complement execution command

Executed every scan.

Executed only once.Executed only once.

Executed every scan.

1913. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.27 Basic instruction (32-bit)

19

3.27.10 Data conversion instructions: BIN 32-bit data BCD conversions ... DBCD, DBCDP

Function

Converts BIN data (0 to 99999999) at the device designated by to BCD data, and stores it at the device designated

by .

Applicable device Digit specification

Error flag Bit device Word (16-bit) device Constant Level

X Y M T C D K H N (SM0) DBCD DBCDP

K1 to K8

S

D

BIN data or start number of the devices where the BIN data is stored (BIN 32 bits)

Setting data

S

Start number of the devices where BCD data will be stored (BCD 8 digits)D

DBCDP

DBCD Command

Command

S D

S D

DBCD

S

D

BCD conversion

+1 (Upper 4 digits)

0 BIN 99999999

Must always be "0" (upper 5 digits).

0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0 BCD 99999999

Ten millions digits

1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1

Millions digits

Hundred thousands digits

Ten thousands digits

Thousands digits

Hundreds digits

Tens digits

Ones digits

+1 (Upper 16 bits) (Lower 16 bits)

(Lower 4 digits)

1248 1248 1248 1248 1248 1248 1248 1248

S

D

10 7

10 6

10 5

10 4

10 3

10 2

10 1

10 0

231 230 229 228 227 226 225 224 223 222 221 220 219 218 217 216 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

S S

DD

2 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.27 Basic instruction (32-bit)

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

3.27.11 Data conversion instructions: BIN 32-bit data BIN conversions ... DBIN, DBINP

Function

Converts BCD data (0 to 99999999) at the device designated by to BIN data, and stores at the device designated by .

Applicable device Digit specification

Error flag Bit device Word (16-bit) device Constant Level

X Y M T C D K H N (SM0) DBIN DBINP

K1 to K8

S

D

BCD data or start number of the devices where the BCD data is stored (BCD 8 digits)

Setting data

S

Start number of the devices where BIN data will be stored (BIN 32 bits)D

DBINP

DBIN Command

Command

S D

S D

DBIN

S D

0 BCD 99999999

Ten millions digits

1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1

Millions digits

Hundred thousands digits

Ten thousands digits

Thousands digits

Hundreds digits

Tens digits

Ones digits

BIN conversion

+1

0 BIN 99999999

Always filled with 0s.

0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

+1

1248 1248 1248 1248 1248 1248 1248 1248

S

D

10 7

10 6

10 5

10 4

10 3

10 2

10 1

10 0

231 230 229 228 227 226 225 224 223 222 221 220 219 218 217 216 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

S S

D D

1933. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.27 Basic instruction (32-bit)

19

3.27.12 Program branch instruction:CJ, SCJ, JMP, GOEND

Function

When the execution command is ON, the program of the specified pointer number in the same program file is executed. When the execution command is OFF, the program in the next step is executed.

From the next scan after the execution command is turned ON, the program of the specified pointer number in the same program file is executed. While the execution command is OFF or when the command is turned OFF, the program in the next step is executed.

CJ

CJ

Execution Command OFF

ON

Executed every scan.

SCJ

SCJ

Execution Command OFF

ON

Executed every scan.1 scan

Command

Command

P

PSCJ

CJ P represents the pointer number (device name) of the jump destination.

Setting data

P

PJMP

CommandLabel P

Pointer branch

Jump to END Command

GOEND

4 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.27 Basic instruction (32-bit)

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

The program of the specified pointer number in the same program file is executed unconditionally. An operation error occurs in the following cases. The error flag (SM0) turns ON and the error code is stored in SD0.

The program jumps to FEND or END instruction in the same program file.

Error code Fault definition 4210 (CANT EXECUTE(P)) (Refer to page 224)

The specified pointer number does not exist before the END instruction. The pointer number that is not used as a label in the same program is specified.

Error code Fault definition 4210 (CANT EXECUTE(P)) (Refer to page 224)

The END instruction does not exist.

SCJ

Execution Command OFF

ON

Not executed.1 scan

JMP

GOEND

1953. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.27 Basic instruction (32-bit)

19

3.28 Application instructions (16-bit) Application instructions (16-bit) are used when special processing is required.

3.28.1 Logical operation instructions Logical operation instructions are instructions that execute logical operations such as logical OR or logical AND.

There are 10 types of logical operation instruction as shown below.

NOTE Logical operation instructions execute the following processes in increments of bits.

Classification Instruction symbol

Classification Instruction symbol

Classification Instruction symbol

Logical AND WAND Exclusive OR WXOR 2's complement (code reversed)

NEG WANDP WXORP NEGP

Logical OR WOR Exclusive NOR WXNR WORP WXNRP

Classification Process Formula Example A B Y

Logical AND Set 1 when the inputs of both A and B are 1. Set 0 in all other cases.

Y=AB 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1

Logical OR Set 0 when the inputs of both A and B are 0. Set 1 in all other cases.

Y=A+B 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1

Exclusive OR Set 0 when the inputs of both A and B are equal. Set 1 when they are different.

Y=AB+AB 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0

Exclusive NOR Set 1 when the inputs of both A and B are equal. Set 0 when they are different.

Y= (A+B) (A+B) 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1

6 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.28 Application instructions (16-bit)

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

3.28.2 Logical operation instruction: BIN 16-bit logical AND ... WAND, WANDP

Applicable device Digit specification

Error flag Bit device Word (16-bit) device Constant Level

X Y M T C D K H N (SM0) WAND K1 to K4

S

D

S1

S2

D1

Start number of the data that executes the logical AND or the device in which the data is stored

Setting data

S

S1

S2

D Start number of the device in which the logical AND results are storedD1

WANDP

Operation commands

Operation commands

WAND

WANDP

WAND

1973. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.28 Application instructions (16-bit)

19

Function

Logical AND is executed for each bit of the 16-bit data of the device specified with and 16-bit data of the device

specified with , and the results are stored in the device specified with .

Logical AND is executed for each bit of the 16-bit data of the device specified with and 16-bit data of the device

specified with , and the results are stored in the device specified with .

Bits of the bit device higher than the specified digit are operated as 0.

Execution condition The execution conditions for logical AND instructions are as follows.

WAND

D

S D

Before execution

After execution

16 bits

S1

S2 D1

After execution

16 bits

Before execution

WAND

WANDP

Operation command

Executed every scan.

Executed every scan.

Executed only once.Executed only once.

8 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.28 Application instructions (16-bit)

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Program example

Program that masks the tenth digit (the second digit from the bottom) of the BCD 4 digits when XA turns ON.

Program that executes logical AND for X10 to 1B data and D33 data when XA turns ON, and outputs the results to Y0 to B.

WAND

Coding

(D10)=1234 1204

ANDs X10-1B data and D33 data and stores result to D33.

Outputs D33 data to Y0-F.

Coding

X1B to 10

D33

X1B X1A X19 X18 X17 X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10

b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0b15 b14 b13 b12

D33

Regarded as 0(s).

Turn to 0(s).

1993. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.28 Application instructions (16-bit)

20

3.28.3 Logical operation instruction: BIN 16-bit logical OR ... WOR, WORP

Function

Logical OR is executed for each bit of the 16-bit data of the device specified with and 16-bit data of the device specified

with , and the results are stored in the device specified with .

Logical OR is executed for each bit of the 16-bit data of the device specified with and 16-bit data of the device specified

with , and the results are stored in the device specified with .

Bits of the bit device higher than the specified digit are operated as 0.

Applicable device Digit specification

Error flag Bit device Word (16-bit) device Constant Level

X Y M T C D K H N (SM0) WOR K1 to K4

S

D

S1

S2

D1

Start number of the data that executes the logical OR or the device in which the data is stored

Setting data

S

S1

S2

D Start number of the device in which the logical OR results are stored

D1

WORP

WOR

WORP

WOR

Operation commands

Operation commands

WOR

D

S D

Before execution

After execution

16 bits

S1

S2 D1

Before execution

After execution

16 bits

0 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.28 Application instructions (16-bit)

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Execution condition The execution conditions for logical OR instructions are as follows.

Program example

Program that executes logical OR for D10 and D20 data when XA turns ON, and stores the results in D10.

Program that executes logical OR for X10 to 1B data and D33 data when XA turns ON, and outputs the results to Y0 to B.

WOR

WORP

Operation command

Executed every scan.

Executed only once.Executed only once.

Executed every scan.

WOR

Coding

Coding

2013. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.28 Application instructions (16-bit)

20

3.28.4 Logical operation instruction: BIN 16-bit data exclusive OR ... WXOR, WXORP

Function

Exclusive OR is executed for each bit of the 16-bit data of the device specified with and 16-bit data of the device

specified with , and the results are stored in the device specified with .

Exclusive OR is executed for each bit of the 16-bit data of the device specified with and 16-bit data of the device

specified with , and the results are stored in the device specified with .

Bits of the bit device higher than the specified digit are operated as 0.

Applicable device Digit specification

Error flag Bit device Word (16-bit) device Constant Level

X Y M T C D K H N (SM0) WXOR K1 to K4

S

D

S1

S2

D1

Start number of the data that executes the exclusive OR or the device in which the data is stored

Setting data

S

S1

S2

D Start number of the device in which the exclusive OR results are storedD1

WXORP

WXOR

WXORP

WXOR

Operation commands

Operation commands

WXOR

D

S D

16 bits

Before execution

After execution

S1

S2 D1

Before execution

After execution

16 bits

2 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.28 Application instructions (16-bit)

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Execution condition The execution conditions for exclusive OR instructions are as follows.

Program example

Program that executes exclusive OR for D10 and D20 data when XA turns ON, and stores the results in D10.

Program that executes exclusive OR for X10 to 1B data and D33 data when XA turns ON, and outputs the results to Y30 to 3B.

WXOR

WXORP

Operation command

Executed every scan.

Executed only once.Executed only once.

Executed every scan.

WXOR

2033. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.28 Application instructions (16-bit)

20

3.28.5 Logical operation instruction: BIN 16-bit data exclusive NOR ... WXNR, WXNRP

Applicable device Digit specification

Error flag Bit device Word (16-bit) device Constant Level

X Y M T C D K H N (SM0) WXNR K1 to K4

S

D

S1

S2

D1

Start number of the data that executes the exclusive NOR or the device in which the data is stored

Setting data

S

S1

S2

D Start number of the device in which the exclusive NOR results are storedD1

WXNRP

Operation commands

Operation commands

WXNR

WXNRP

WXNR

4 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.28 Application instructions (16-bit)

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Function

Exclusive NOR is executed for the 16-bit data of the device specified with and 16-bit data of the device specified with

, and the results are stored in the device specified with .

Exclusive NOR is executed for the 16-bit data of the device specified with and 16-bit data of the device specified with

, and the results are stored in the device specified with .

Bits of the bit device higher than the specified digit are operated as 0.

Execution condition The execution conditions for exclusive NOR instructions are as follows.

Program example

Program that executes exclusive NOR for the 16-bit data of X30 to 3F and D99 data when X0 turns ON, and stores the results in D7.

WXNR

D

S D

Before execution

After execution

16 bits

S1

S2 D1

Before execution

After execution

16 bits

WXNR

WXNRP

Operation command

Executed every scan.

Executed only once.Executed only once.

Executed every scan.

WXNR

2053. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.28 Application instructions (16-bit)

20

3.29 Application instructions (32-bit) Application instructions (32-bit) are used when special processing is required.

3.29.1 Logical operation instructions Logical operation instructions are instructions that execute logical operations such as logical OR or logical AND.

There are 10 types of logical operation instruction as shown below.

NOTE Logical operation instructions execute the following processes in increments of bits.

Classification Instruction symbol

Classification Instruction symbol

Classification Instruction symbol

Logical AND DAND Exclusive OR DXOR 2's complement (code reversed)

DNEG DANDP DXORP DNEGP

Logical OR DOR Exclusive NOR DXNR DORP DXNRP

Classification Process Formula Example A B Y

Logical AND Set 1 when the inputs of both A and B are 1. Set 0 in all other cases.

Y=AB 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1

Logical OR Set 0 when the inputs of both A and B are 0. Set 1 in all other cases.

Y=A+B 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1

Exclusive OR Set 0 when the inputs of both A and B are equal. Set 1 when they are different.

Y=AB+AB 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0

Exclusive NOR Set 1 when the inputs of both A and B are equal. Set 0 when they are different.

Y= (A+B) (A+B) 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1

6 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.29 Application instructions (32-bit)

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

3.29.2 Logical operation instruction: BIN 32-bit logical AND ... DAND, DANDP

Applicable device Digit specification

Error flag Bit device Word (16-bit) device Constant Level

X Y M T C D K H N (SM0) DAND(P) K1 to K8

S

D

S1

S2

D1

Start number of the data that executes the logical AND or the device in which the data is stored

Setting data

S

S1

S2

D Start number of the device in which the logical AND results are storedD1

2073. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.29 Application instructions (32-bit)

20

Function

Logical AND is executed for each bit of the 32-bit data of the device specified with and 32-bit data of the device

specified with , and the results are stored in the device specified with .

Logical AND is executed for each bit of the 32-bit data of the device specified with and 32-bit data of the device

specified with , and the results are stored in the device specified with .

Bits of the bit device higher than the specified digit are operated as 0.

DAND

D

S D

+ 1

0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 b0b15b31 b16

DAND + 1

1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 b0b15b31 b16

0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 b31 b16 b0b15

+ 1

D

S

D

D D

S

D

D

S

S1

S2 D1

0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 b0b15b31 b16

DAND

1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 b0b15b31 b16

0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 b31 b16 b0b15

+ 1

+ 1

+ 1

S1

S2

S1

S2

S1

S2

D1

D1 D1

8 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.29 Application instructions (32-bit)

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Execution condition The execution conditions for logical AND instructions are as follows.

Program example

The following program performs a logical product operation on the data at D99 and D100, and the 24-bit data between X20 and X37 when X8 is ON, and stores the results at D99 and D100.

DAND

DANDP

Operation command

Executed every scan.

Executed every scan.

Executed only once.Executed only once.

DAND

Coding

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 b31

X37 DAND

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 b31

D100, D99

X37 to X20

D100, D99

b30b29b28b27b26b25b24b23b22 b3 b2 b1 b0

X36 X23X22X21X20

b30b29b28b27b26b25b24b23b22 b3 b2 b1 b0

Regarded as 0s.

20 20

2093. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.29 Application instructions (32-bit)

21

3.29.3 Logical operation instruction: BIN 32-bit logical OR ... DOR, DORP

Function

Logical OR is executed for each bit of the 32-bit data of the device specified with and 32-bit data of the device specified

with , and the results are stored in the device specified with .

Applicable device Digit specification

Error flag Bit device Word (16-bit) device Constant Level

X Y M T C D K H N (SM0) DOR(P) K1 to K8

S

D

S1

S2

D1

Start number of the data that executes the logical OR or the device in which the data is stored

Setting data

S

S1

S2

D Start number of the device in which the logical OR results are stored

D1

DORP

DOR

DORP

DOR

Operation commands

Operation commands

DOR

D

S D

1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 b0b15b31 b16

DOR

1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 b0b15b31 b16

1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 b31 b16 b0b15

+ 1

+ 1

+ 1

D

D

S

D D

D D

S S

0 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.29 Application instructions (32-bit)

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Logical OR is executed for each bit of the 32-bit data of the device specified with and 32-bit data of the device specified

with , and the results are stored in the device specified with .

Bits of the bit device higher than the specified digit are operated as 0.

Execution condition The execution conditions for logical OR instructions are as follows.

S1

S2 D1

0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 b0b15b31 b16

DOR

0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 b0b15b31 b16

0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 b31 b16 b0b15

+ 1

+ 1

+ 1

S1

D1

D1 D1

S2

S1 S1

S2 S2

DOR

DORP

Operation command

Executed every scan.

Executed only once.Executed only once.

Executed every scan.

2113. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.29 Application instructions (32-bit)

21

Program example

The following program performs a logical sum operation on the 32-bit data from X0 to X1F, and on the hexadecimal value FF00FF00H when XB is turned ON, and stores the results at D66 and D67.

The following program performs a logical sum operation on the 32-bit data at D0 and D1, and the 24-bit data from X20 to X37, and stores the results at D23 and D24 when M8 is ON.

DOR

Coding

1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 b0b15b31 b16

DOR

1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 X0XFX1F X10

1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 b31 b16 b0b15

X1C X3

+ 1

+ 1

+ 1

X0

FF00FF00 H

D67,D66

D

S S

D

D D

X1F to

Coading

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 X20X37

DOR

1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 b0b23b31 b24

1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 b31 b16 b0b15

b28 b3 D1, D0

X37 to X20

D24, D23

Regarded as 0s.

0

0

0

X36X35 X23X22X21

b27 b22b21 b2 b1

S

D

S

D

+1

+1

2 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.29 Application instructions (32-bit)

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

3.29.4 Logical operation instruction: BIN 32-bit data exclusive OR ... DXOR, DXORP

Function

Exclusive OR is executed for each bit of the 32-bit data of the device specified with and 32-bit data of the device

specified with , and the results are stored in the device specified with .

Applicable device Digit specification

Error flag Bit device Word (16-bit) device Constant Level

X Y M T C D K H N (SM0) DXOR(P) K1 to K8

S

D

S1

S2

D1

Start number of the data that executes the exclusive OR or the device in which the data is stored

Setting data

S

S1

S2

D Start number of the device in which the exclusive OR results are storedD1

DXORP

DXOR

DXORP

DXOR

Operation commands

Operation commands

DXOR

D

S D

D

S

D

0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 b0b15b31 b16

DXOR + 1

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 b0b15b31 b16

+ 1

0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 b31 b16 b0b15

1

D

S

D + 1

D

S

D

2133. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.29 Application instructions (32-bit)

21

Exclusive OR is executed for each bit of the 32-bit data of the device specified with and 32-bit data of the device

specified with , and the results are stored in the device specified with .

Bits of the bit device higher than the specified digit are operated as 0.

Execution condition The execution conditions for exclusive OR instructions are as follows.

Program example

The following program conducts an exclusive OR operation on the data at D20 and D21, and the data at D30 and D31 when X10 is turned ON, and stores the results at D40 and D41.

S1

S2 D1

1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 b0b15b31 b16

DXOR

1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 b0b15b31 b16

0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 b31 b16 b0b15

+ 1

+ 1

+ 1

S1

D1

D1 D1

S2

S1

S2

S1

S2

DXOR

DXORP

Operation command

Executed every scan.

Executed only once.Executed only once.

Executed every scan.

DXOR

Coding

0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 b0b15b31 b16

DXOR

1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 b0b15b31 b16

1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 b31 b16 b0b15

+ 1

+ 1

+ 1

D21,D20

D31,D30

D41,D40

D

S1 S1

S2 S2

D

4 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.29 Application instructions (32-bit)

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

3.29.5 Logical operation instruction: BIN 32-bit data exclusive NOR ... DXNR, DXNRP

Function

Exclusive NOR is executed for the 32-bit data of the device specified with and 32-bit data of the device specified with

, and the results are stored in the device specified with .

Applicable device Digit specification

Error flag Bit device Word (16-bit) device Constant Level

X Y M T C D K H N (SM0) DXNR(P) K1 to K8

S

D

S1

S2

D1

Start number of the data that executes the exclusive NOR or the device in which the data is stored

Setting data

S

S1

S2

D Start number of the device in which the exclusive NOR results are storedD1

DXNRP

Operation commands

Operation commands

DXNR

DXNRP

DXNR

DXNR

D

S D

1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 b0b15b31 b16

DXNR

1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 b0b15b31 b16

1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 b31 b16 b0b15

+ 1

+ 1

+ 1

D

S

D

D

S

D

D

S

D

2153. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.29 Application instructions (32-bit)

21

Exclusive NOR is executed for the 32-bit data of the device specified with and 32-bit data of the device specified with

, and the results are stored in the device specified with .

Bits of the bit device higher than the specified digit are operated as 0.

Execution condition The execution conditions for exclusive NOR instructions are as follows.

Program example

The following program performs an exclusive NOR operation on the 32-bit data at D20 and D21 and the data at D10 and D11 when X10 is turned ON, and stores the result to D40 and D41.

S1

S2 D1

S1

D1

D1 D1

S2 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 b0b15b31 b16

DXNR

0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 b0b15b31 b16

1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 b31 b16 b0b15

+ 1

+ 1

+ 1S1

S2

S1

S2

DXNR

DXNRP

Operation command

Executed every scan.

Executed only once.Executed only once.

Executed every scan.

DXNR

Coding

0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 b0b15b31 b16

DXNR 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1

1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 b31 b16 b0b15

+ 1

+ 1

+ 1

D21,D20

D11,D10

D41,D40

b0b15b31 b16

D

S S

D

S S

6 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.29 Application instructions (32-bit)

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

3.30 Display instruction

3.30.1 Character string data transfer ... $MOV, $MOVP

Function The character string data enclosed in double-quotation marks (" ") specified with are transferred after the device

number specified in .

Only character string data that is enclosed in double-quotation marks (" ") can be set in . A device can also be input, but doing so results in an error at execution (INSTRCT. CODE ERR: 4000).

Only word devices can be set in . Bit devices can also be input, but doing so results in an error (INSTRCT. CODE ERR: 4000) at execution.

A maximum of 32 characters can be set in . (Up to 16 characters can be transmitted from to . The 17th character or later are invalid.)

If the set number of characters is less than 16, the content of in the sections without corresponding characters remains unchanged.

Applicable device Digit specification

Error flag Bit device Word (16-bit) device Constant Level

X Y M T C D K H N (SM0)

S

D

Transferred character string (Maximum character string: 32 characters (up to 16 characters can be transferred))

Setting data

S

Start number of the device in which the ASCII code is stored

D

S

S

D

D

Command

Command

$MOV

$MOVP

S

D

S

D

S S D

"Character string (16 characters maximum)"

D D D

D

+1 +2

+7

2nd character 4th character 6th character

16th character

1st character 3rd character 5th character

15th character

b15 b8 b0b7

D

"ABCD"

D D D

D

+1 +2

+7

H42 (B) H44 (D)

6th character

16th character

H41 (A) H43 (C)

5th character

15th character

b15 b8 b0b7

The contents of the devices remain unchanged.

2173. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.30 Display instruction

21

3.30.2 Character string output ... G. PRR, GP.PRR, UMSG ,

Function ,

n is not used, but specify U. Register the data to be displayed on the LCD operation panel (FR-LU08) or the parameter unit (FR-PU07) in the device

specified with .

is not used, but specify Y.

Register the data to be displayed on the LCD operation panel (FR-LU08) or the parameter unit (FR-PU07) in the device

specified with .

Applicable device Others U

Digit specification

Error flag Bit device Word (16-bit) device Constant Level

X Y M T C D K H N (SM0) n

Applicable device Digit specification

Error flag Bit device Word (16-bit) device Constant Level

X Y M T C D K H N (SM0)

G.PRR GP.PRR

S

D

Not used, but U is specified

Setting data

n

Character string that is displayed on the display unit or the start number of the devices containing the character string to be displayed

S

Not used, but Y is specifiedD

S

S

D

D

Command

Command

n

n

G.PRR

GP.PRR

UMSG

S

Setting data

Character string that is displayed on the display unit or the start number of the devices containing the character string to be displayed

S

Command SUMSG

G.PRR GP.PRR

S

D

UMSG

S

8 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.30 Display instruction

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Setting data: For user monitor name Set the monitor name as shown below when SD1216 to 1218 are monitored by the LCD operation panel (FR-LU08) or the parameter unit (FR-PU07).

Set 01 to the lower 8 bits of +0.

Set the monitor description number to replace the user monitor name display in the upper 8 bits of +0. The monitor description number is as shown below.

When the upper 8 bits of +0 are values other than those in the table above, an operation error (OPERATION ERROR: 4100) is generated.

When the 7th bit of +0 is executed as 1 (lower 8 bits as H81), the registered data is cleared and the monitor display returns to normal.

Settings can be made up to the 16th character. (Data from +1 to +8 are effective as characters.) Up to 12 characters can be displayed on the FR-LU08 or the FR-PU07. When the number of characters exceeds 12, the

13th character or later will not appear.

NOTE To display the monitor above on the parameter unit (FR-LU08 or FR-PU07), set "40, 41, 42" in Pr.774 to Pr.776 in

advance. (For details on Pr.774 to Pr.776, refer to the Instruction Manual (Detailed) of the inverter.)

Setting data: For user-defined error name Set the user-defined error name as shown below to display the user-defined error on the LCD operation panel (FR-LU08) or the parameter unit (FR-PU07). (A user defined error occurs when values 16 (H10) to 20 (H14) are set in SD1214.)

Set an error number that corresponds to the upper 8 bits of +0. The setting range is from 16 (H10) to 20 (H14).

When the upper 8 bits of +0 are values other than 16 (H10) to 20 (H14), an operation error (OPERATION ERROR: 4100) is generated.

Monitor description number

Monitor description

40 (H28) User monitor 1: SD1216 description 41 (H29) User monitor 2: SD1217 description 42 (H2A) User monitor 3: SD1218 description

Upper 8 bits

+0 **** Set the corresponding monitor number to the upper 8 bits, and 01 to the lower 8 bits.

Monitor name: Character start

+8

S

S

Lower 8 bits

01

2nd character 1st character 4th character 3rd character 6th character 5th character 8th character 7th character 10th character 9th character 12th character 11th character 14th character 13th character 16th character 15th character

S

S

S

S

S S

+0 Set the corresponding error number to the upper 8 bits, and 02 to the lower 8 bits.

Error name: Character start

+8

S

S

2nd character 1st character 4th character 3rd character 6th character 5th character 8th character 7th character 10th character 9th character 12th character 11th character 14th character 13th character 16th character 15th character

Upper 8 bits

****

Lower 8 bits

02

S

S

2193. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.30 Display instruction

22

When the 7th bit of +0 is executed as 1 (lower 8 bits as H82), the registered data is cleared.

Settings can be made up to the 16th character. (Data from +1 to +8 are effective as characters.) Up to 12 characters can be displayed on the FR-LU08 or the FR-PU07. When the number of characters exceeds 12, the

13th character or later will not appear.

Setting data: For user parameter name Set the parameter name as shown below to display the read user parameters Pr.1150 to Pr.1159 on the LCD operation panel (FR-LU08).

Set the corresponding parameter number the upper 8 bits of +0.

When the upper 8 bits of +0 are values other than those in the table above, an operation error (OPERATION ERROR: 4101) is generated.

When the 7th bit of +0 is executed as 1 (lower 8 bits as H83), the registered data is cleared.

Settings can be made up to the 16th character. (Data from +1 to +8 are effective as characters) Up to 9 characters can be displayed on the FR-LU08. When the number of characters exceeds 9, the 10th character or

later will not appear.

Parameter number Setting value 1150 01(H01) 1151 02(H02) 1152 03(H03) 1153 04(H04) 1154 05(H05) 1155 06(H06) 1156 07(H07) 1157 08(H08) 1158 09(H09) 1159 10(H0A)

S

S S

+0 Set the corresponding parameter number to the upper 8 bits, and 03 to the lower 8 bits.

Parameter name: Character start

+8

S

S

2nd character 1st character 4th character 3rd character 6th character 5th character 8th character 7th character 10th character 9th character 12th character 11th character 14th character 13th character 16th character 15th character

Upper 8 bits

****

Lower 8 bits

03

S

S

S

S S

0 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.30 Display instruction

3

4

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Setting data: For unit names This function sets up the increment for the user monitors SD1216 to SD1218 or the user parameters Pr.1150 to Pr.1159 using the LCD operation panel (FR-LU08) or the parameter unit (FR-PU07).

Set 04 to the lower 8 bits of +0.

To replace the unit displayed, set the number corresponding to the target monitor or parameter in the upper 8 bits of +0. Numbers that can be specified are shown in the following table.

When the upper 8 bits of +0 are values other than those in the table above, an operation error (OPERATION ERROR: 4100) is generated.

When the 7th bit of +0 is executed as 1 (lower 8 bits as H84), the registered data is cleared.

Settings can be made up to the 3rd character. ( +1 to +2: Data up to the lower 8 bits are effective as characters.)

Quantity that can be set

*1 If any of the setting quantities is exceeded, an operation error (OPERATION ERROR: 4100) occurs at the point when the exceeded setting is

executed. Furthermore, an operation error (OPERATION ERROR: 4100) also occurs if the lower 8 bits of +0 are set to values other than 01 to 04, or H81 to H84.

NOTE An error does not occur even if the stored data exceeds the range of the corresponding device, but the content of devices

outside of the range is changed. When storing data, check beforehand that the amount of devices required for storage can be allocated.

Do not change any of the device data while it is being displayed because the data stored in the device is used in actual communication. Changing such data will change the transmitted data.

If the ASCII data is other than H20 to H7A that can be displayed on the FR-LU08 or the FR-PU07, it can be replaced with H20 (space).

[ ^ ] (H5E), [ _ ] (H5F) and [ ' ] (H60) cannot be displayed by the FR-PU07.

Number of unit name

Item to add unit

01(H01) Unit corresponding to Pr.1150 02(H02) Unit corresponding to Pr.1151 03(H03) Unit corresponding to Pr.1152 04(H04) Unit corresponding to Pr.1153 05(H05) Unit corresponding to Pr.1154 06(H06) Unit corresponding to Pr.1155 07(H07) Unit corresponding to Pr.1156 08(H08) Unit corresponding to Pr.1157 09(H09) Unit corresponding to Pr.1158 10(H0A) Unit corresponding to Pr.1159 40(H28) User monitor 1: Unit corresponding to the description of SD1216 41(H29) User monitor 2: Unit corresponding to the description of SD1217 42(H2A) User monitor 3: Unit corresponding to the description of SD1218

Setting data Quantity User monitor (Refer to page 219.) Up to 3*1

User definition error (Refer to page 219.) Up to 5*1

User parameter (Refer to page 220.) Up to 10*1

Unit name (Refer to page 221.) Up to 13*1

+0 **** Set the corresponding user monitor number to the upper 8 bits, and 04 to the lower 8 bits.

Unit name: Character start

+2

S

S

Lower 8 bitsUpper 8 bits

04

3rd character

1st character2nd character

S

S

S

S

S S

S

2213. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.30 Display instruction

22

MEMO

2 3. SEQUENCE PROGRAM 3.30 Display instruction

CHAPTER 4

C H

A PT

ER 4

4

5

ERROR CODE LIST

6

7

8

9

10

4.1 How to read error codes .......................................................................................................................................224

223

22

4 ERROR CODE LIST If an error occurs when PLC function is RUN or during RUN, an error indication is generated by the self-diagnostic function, and an error code and error step are stored in the special register. The error description and corrective action are as follows:

4.1 How to read error codes When an error occurs, the error code can be read using a peripheral device. For details on the operation method, refer to the operating manual of the peripheral device. The error code, error name, error description possible cause, and corrective actions are as follows. Error codes are stored in SD0, and the error steps are stored in SD4 to SD26.

Error code (SD0)

Error name Error description possible cause Corrective action

1010 END NOT EXECUTE All programs in the program capacity are executed without executing the END instruction. After the END instruction was

executed, a different instruction code was read due to noise, etc.

The END instruction has changed to a different instruction code for some reason.

Take measures against noise. Perform an inverter reset and go to the RUN

state again. If the same error is displayed again, a CPU

hardware error has occurred. Please contact your sales representative and explain the failure symptom.

2200 MISSING PARA. There are no parameter files. Set a parameter file. 2503 CAN'T EXE. PRG. No program file exists. Check the configuration of the program file.

Write a program file. 3000 PARAMETER ERROR The content of the parameter

indicated by the error individual information (SD16) is incorrect.

Read the error individual information with a programming tool, check the parameter items that correspond to the values (parameter number) and correct them.

Re-write the corrected parameters, reset the power or reset the inverter.

If the same error is displayed again, a CPU hardware error has occurred. Please contact your sales representative and explain the failure symptom.

3003 PARAMETER ERROR The number of device points set in the PLC parameter device setting is not within the usable range.

Read the error individual information with a programming tool, check the parameter items that correspond to the values (parameter number) and correct them.

If the error occurs again after correcting the parameter, a memory error has occurred in the program memory. Please contact your sales representative and explain the failure symptom.

4000 INSTRCT. CODE ERR An undecodable instruction code is included in the program.

An unusable instruction is included in the program.

Read the common error information with a programming tool, check the error step that corresponds to the value (program error location) and correct it.

4010 MISSING END INS. No END (FEND) instruction in the program.

Read the common error information with a programming tool, check the error step that corresponds to the value (program error location) and correct it.

4021*1 CANT SET(P) The same pointer number is assigned to multiple common/local pointers used in each file.

Read the common error information with a programming tool, check the error step that corresponds to the value (program error location) and correct it.

4100 OPERATION ERROR Data that cannot be used in instructions is included.

Read the common error information with a programming tool, check the error step that corresponds to the value (program error location) and correct it.

4 4. ERROR CODE LIST 4.1 How to read error codes

3

4

5

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

*1 Supported by the FR-E800 series only.

4101*1 OPERATION ERROR The number of data used in the instruction is set to exceed the available range.

The data or constants stored in the device specified by the instruction exceed the available range.

For writing to the host CPU shared memory, the write inhibited area is specified as the write destination address.

The ranges of the stored data of the devices specified by the instruction are overlapping.

The device specified by the instruction exceeds the range for the number of device points.

The interrupt pointer number specified by the instruction exceeds the available range.

Read the common error information with a programming tool, check the error step that corresponds to the value (program error location) and correct it.

4210*1 CANT EXECUTE(P) The specified pointer number does not exist before the END instruction.

The pointer number that is not used as a label in the same program is specified.

The END instruction does not exist.

Read the common error information with a programming tool, check the error step that corresponds to the value (program error location) and correct it.

5001 WDT ERROR The program scan time exceeded the watchdog timer value set in the PLC RAS setting of the PLC function parameter.

Read the error individual information with the programming tool, check the values (time) and shorten the scan time.

Change the initial execution monitoring time or watchdog setting values with the PLC RAS settings of the PLC function parameter.

Delete the infinite loop from the jump transition.

Check the number of executions of the interrupt program with a programming tool, and reduce the number of interrupt occurrences.

5010 PRG. TIME OVER The program scan time exceeded the constant scan time set in the PLC RAS setting of the PLC function parameter.

Review the constant scan time setting. Review the PLC parameter constant scan

time and low-speed program execution time in order to secure sufficient remaining time for the constant scan.

Error code (SD0)

Error name Error description possible cause Corrective action

2254. ERROR CODE LIST 4.1 How to read error codes

22

MEMO

6 4. ERROR CODE LIST 4.1 How to read error codes

CHAPTER 5

C H

A PT

ER 5

4

5

APPENDIX

6

7

8

9

10

5.1 Instruction processing time ...................................................................................................................................228

227

22

5 APPENDIX

5.1 Instruction processing time Basic instructions Sequence instructions

Comparison operation instructions

Classification Instruction Condition (device)

Processing time (s)

Contact LD 1.9 LDI 1.9 AND 1.9 ANI 1.9 OR 2.0 ORI 2.0

Link ORB 1.3 ANB 1.3 MPS 1.4 MRD 1.4 MPP 1.4

Output OUT Y,M,SM 2.4 OUT T 7.6 OUT C 7.9 SET Y,M,SM 2.6 RST Y,M,SM 2.6 RST T 9.2 RST C 10.0 RST D 4.3 PLS 3.4 PLF 3.4

Shift SFT 3.4 SFTP 4.2

Master control MC 3.8 MCR 1.3

Program end END, FEND

0.8

Non- processing

NOP 1.3

Classification Instruction Condition (device)

Processing time (s)

Subset*1 Other than

subset BIN 16-bit data comparison

LD= S1 S2 8.0 9.9 LD<> S1 S2 8.0 9.9 LD< S1 S2 8.0 9.9 LD> S1 S2 8.0 9.9 LD<= S1 S2 8.1 10.0 LD>= S1 S2 8.1 10.0 AND= S1 S2 8.2 9.6 AND<> S1 S2 8.2 9.7 AND< S1 S2 8.4 9.8 AND> S1 S2 8.3 9.7 AND<= S1 S2 8.3 9.7 AND>= S1 S2 8.3 9.7 OR= S1 S2 8.7 9.8 OR<> S1 S2 8.6 9.8 OR< S1 S2 8.6 9.8 OR> S1 S2 8.6 9.8 OR<= S1 S2 8.8 9.9 OR>= S1 S2 8.8 9.9

BIN 32-bit data comparison

LDD= S1 S2 8.8 11.1 LDD<> S1 S2 8.8 11.1 LDD< S1 S2 8.8 11.1 LDD> S1 S2 8.8 11.1 LDD<= S1 S2 8.8 11.1 LDD>= S1 S2 8.8 11.1 ANDD= S1 S2 9.2 11.0 ANDD<> S1 S2 9.2 11.0 ANDD< S1 S2 9.2 11.0 ANDD> S1 S2 9.2 11.0 ANDD<= S1 S2 9.2 11.0 ANDD>= S1 S2 9.2 11.0 ORD= S1 S2 9.4 9.9 ORD<> S1 S2 9.4 9.9 ORD< S1 S2 9.4 9.9 ORD> S1 S2 9.4 9.9 ORD<= S1 S2 9.4 9.9 ORD>= S1 S2 9.4 9.9

8 5. APPENDIX 5.1 Instruction processing time

3

4

5

5

5

6

7

8

9

10

Arithmetic operation instructions

Data transfer instructions

Data conversion instructions

*1 When all the devices used in the instruction satisfy one of the following conditions, they are regarded as a subset. All the devices used are word devices. When the devices used are bit devices, the specified number of bits is the multiple of 16, or the digits are specified as K4 (word data) or K8 (double word data). The devices used are constants.

NOTE During inverter control, reading 1000 steps takes a scan

time of about 40 ms.

Application instructions Logical operation instructions

Classification Instruction Condition (device)

Processing time (s)

Subset*1 Other than

subset BIN 16-bit addition/ subtraction

+ S D 8.4 13.5 +P S D 11.0 14.3 - S D 8.4 13.5 -P S D 11.0 14.3 + S1S2 D 8.4 13.6 +P S1S2 D 11.0 14.5 - S1S2 D 8.4 13.6 -P S1S2 D 11.0 14.5

BIN 32-bit addition/ subtraction

D+ S D 9.6 15.6 D+P S D 12.0 16.4 D- S D 9.6 15.6 D-P S D 12.0 16.4 D+ S1S2 D 9.6 15.7 D+P S1S2 D 12.0 16.5 D- S1S2 D 9.5 15.7 D-P S1S2 D 12.0 16.5

BIN 16-bit multiplication/ division

* S1S2 D 8.7 13.9 *P S1S2 D 11.2 14.7 / S1S2 D 8.9 14.2 /P S1S2 D 11.5 15.0

BIN 32-bit multiplication/ division

D* S1S2 D 9.7 15.7 D*P S1S2 D 12.2 16.5 D/ S1S2 D 10.1 15.9 D/P S1S2 D 12.6 16.7

Data increment/ decrement

INC D 5.8 11.1 INCP D 7.6 11.8 DEC D 5.8 11.1 DECP D 7.6 11.9 DINC D 6.5 12.6 DINCP D 8.2 13.4 DDEC D 6.5 12.6 DDECP D 8.2 13.4

Classification Instruction Condition (device)

Processing time (s)

Subset*1 Other than

subset 16-bit transfer MOV 5.8 13.5

MOVP 7.6 14.2 32-bit transfer DMOV 6.4 15.6

DMOVP 8.3 16.4

Classification Instruction Condition (device)

Processing time (s)

Subset*1 Other than

subset 2's complement

NEG D 8.8 11.1 NEGP D 9.5 11.8 DNEG D 8.8 12.6 DNEGP D 9.6 13.4

BCD conversion

BCD S D 5.8 13.7 BCDP S D 8.3 14.5 DBCD S D 7.8 16.9 DBCDP S D 9.6 17.7

BIN conversion BIN S D 5.9 13.7 BINP S D 7.6 14.6 DBIN S D 6.8 16.1 DBINP S D 8.5 16.9

Classification Instruction Condition (device)

Processing time (s)

Subset*1 Other than

subset Logical OR WOR S D 8.6 13.6

WORP S D 11.2 14.4 WOR S1 S2 D 8.6 13.6 WORP S1 S2 D 11.2 14.4 DOR S D 9.7 15.7 DORP S D 12.2 16.5 DOR S1 S2 D 9.7 15.7 DORP S1 S2 D 12.2 16.5

Logical AND WAND S D 8.6 13.6 WANDP S D 11.2 14.4 WAND S1 S2 D 8.6 13.6 WANDP S1 S2 D 11.2 14.4 DAND S D 9.7 15.7 DANDP S D 12.2 16.5 DAND S1 S2 D 9.7 15.7 DANDP S1 S2 D 12.2 16.5

Exclusive OR WXOR S D 8.6 13.6 WXORP S D 11.2 14.4 WXOR S1 S2 D 8.6 13.6 WXORP S1 S2 D 11.2 14.4 DXOR S D 9.7 15.7 DXORP S D 12.2 16.5 DXOR S1 S2 D 9.7 15.7 DXORP S1 S2 D 12.2 16.5

Classification Instruction Condition (device)

Processing time (s)

Subset*1 Other than

subset

2295. APPENDIX 5.1 Instruction processing time

23

Instructions regarding the message display on PU

*1 When all the devices used in the instruction satisfy one of the following conditions, they are regarded as a subset. All the devices used are word devices. When the devices used are bit devices, the specified number of bits is the multiple of 16, or the digits are specified as K4 (word data) or K8 (double word data). The devices used are constants.

NOTE During inverter control, reading 1000 steps takes a scan

time of about 40 ms.

Exclusive NOR WXNR S D 8.6 13.6 WXNRP S D 11.2 14.4 WXNR S1 S2 D 8.6 13.6 WXNRP S1 S2 D 11.2 14.4 DXNR S D 9.7 15.7 DXNRP S D 12.2 16.5 DXNR S1 S2 D 9.7 15.7 DXNRP S1 S2 D 12.2 16.5

Classification Instruction Condition (device)

Processing time (s)

Character string data transfer

$MOV 12.6 $MOVP 13.3

Character string output

G.PRR 8.7 GP.PRR 9.6 UMSG 5.3

Classification Instruction Condition (device)

Processing time (s)

Subset*1 Other than

subset

0 5. APPENDIX 5.1 Instruction processing time

3

4

5

5

5

6

7

8

9

10

5.2 How to check specification changes Check the SERIAL number indicated on the inverter rating plate or packaging. For how to read the SERIAL number, refer to page 8

5.2.1 Details of specification changes Functions available for the inverters manufactured in January 2021 or

later Error code Fault definition Series

Device Supported 32-point devices: Timer (T16 to T31), retentive timer (ST16 to ST31), and counter (C16 to C31)

FR-A800 FR-A800 Plus (FR-A800-CRN/LC) FR-F800

Supported pointer (P) Supported special registers: SD1168 (ideal speed command), SD1173

(position command, lower 16 bits), SD1174 (position command, upper 16 bits), SD1175 (current position, lower 16 bits), SD1176 (current position, upper 16 bits), SD1177 (droop pulse, lower 16 bits), SD1178 (droop pulse, upper 16 bits), SD1191 (PTC thermistor resistance value)

Added error codes: 4021 CAN'T SET(P), 4101 OPERATION ERROR, 4210 CAN'T EXECUTE(P)

FR-E800

Programming language

Structured text (ST)

Sequence instruction

Added program branch instructions CJ, SCJ, JMP, and GOEND

Changed parameter setting range

Setting values "38 and 138" added for Pr.544

2315. APPENDIX 5.2 How to check specification changes

232

REVISIONS *The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.

Print date *Manual number Revision Aug. 2013 IB(NA)-0600492ENG-A First edition May 2014 IB(NA)-0600492ENG-B Modification

USB communication and RS-485 communication (RS-485 terminals) with FR Configurator2 (Developer) supported

Added FR-A806 error code (E.IAH)

Mar. 2015 IB(NA)-0600492ENG-C Added Compatibility with the FR-F800 series Setting values "24, 28, and 128" of Pr.544

Mar. 2017 IB(NA)-0600492ENG-D Added Compatibility with the Ethernet Compatibility with the FR-A800 Plus series

Dec. 2019 IB(NA)-0600492ENG-E Added Compatibility with the FR-E800 series

Apr. 2020 IB(NA)-0600492ENG-F Added FR-E800-SCE (safety communication model)

Jun. 2020 IB(NA)-0600492ENG-G Added Availability of special devices for position pulse and feedback pulse for the FR-E800

Nov. 2020 IB(NA)-0600492ENG-H Added FR-A800/FR-A800 Plus (FR-A800-CRN/LC)/FR-F800 series

32-point devices: timer, retentive timer, and counter FR-E800 series

Programming language (structured text (ST)) Device: pointer (P) Program branch instructions (CJ, SCJ, JMP, and GOEND) Error codes (4021, 4022, and 4101) Special registers SD1168, SD1173, SD1174, SD1175, SD1176, SD1177, SD1178, and SD1191

Oct. 2021 IB(NA)-0600492ENG-J Added FR-E800 series

Special registers SD1193, and SD1194 Apr. 2022 IB(NA)-0600492ENG-K Added

FR-E800 series Special registers SD200

IB(NA)-0600492ENG-K

IN VER

TER FR

-A 800/F800/E800

PLC FU

N C

TIO N

PR O

G R

A M

M IN

G M

A N

U A

L

K

INVERTER

PLC FUNCTION PROGRAMMING MANUAL

IB(NA)-0600492ENG-K(2204)MEE Printed in Japan Specifications subject to change without notice.

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the A800 Mitsubishi works, you can view and download the Mitsubishi A800 Inverter Programming Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Programming Manual for Mitsubishi A800 as well as other Mitsubishi manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Programming Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Mitsubishi A800. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Mitsubishi A800 Inverter Programming Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Mitsubishi A800 Inverter Programming Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Mitsubishi A800 Inverter Programming Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Mitsubishi A800 Inverter Programming Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mitsubishi A800 Inverter Programming Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.